2018-05-06 21:58:06 +00:00
|
|
|
# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
#
|
Licenses: introduce SPDX Unique Lincense Identifiers
Like many other projects, U-Boot has a tradition of including big
blocks of License headers in all files. This not only blows up the
source code with mostly redundant information, but also makes it very
difficult to generate License Clearing Reports. An additional problem
is that even the same lincenses are referred to by a number of
slightly varying text blocks (full, abbreviated, different
indentation, line wrapping and/or white space, with obsolete address
information, ...) which makes automatic processing a nightmare.
To make this easier, such license headers in the source files will be
replaced with a single line reference to Unique Lincense Identifiers
as defined by the Linux Foundation's SPDX project [1]. For example,
in a source file the full "GPL v2.0 or later" header text will be
replaced by a single line:
SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
We use the SPDX Unique Lincense Identifiers here; these are available
at [2].
Note: From the legal point of view, this patch is supposed to be only
a change to the textual representation of the license information,
but in no way any change to the actual license terms. With this patch
applied, all files will still be licensed under the same terms they
were before.
Note 2: The apparent difference between the old "COPYING" and the new
"Licenses/gpl-2.0.txt" only results from switching to the upstream
version of the license which is differently formatted; there are not
any actual changes to the content.
Note 3: There are some recurring questions about linense issues, such
as:
- Is a "All Rights Reserved" clause a problem in GPL code?
- Are files without any license header a problem?
- Do we need license headers at all?
The following excerpt from an e-mail by Daniel B. Ravicher should help
with these:
| Message-ID: <4ADF8CAA.5030808@softwarefreedom.org>
| Date: Wed, 21 Oct 2009 18:35:22 -0400
| From: "Daniel B. Ravicher" <ravicher@softwarefreedom.org>
| To: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
| Subject: Re: GPL and license cleanup questions
|
| Mr. Denk,
|
| Wolfgang Denk wrote:
| > - There are a number of files which do not include any specific
| > license information at all. Is it correct to assume that these files
| > are automatically covered by the "GPL v2 or later" clause as
| > specified by the COPYING file in the top level directory of the
| > U-Boot source tree?
|
| That is a very fact specific analysis and could be different across the
| various files. However, if the contributor could reasonably be expected
| to have known that the project was licensed GPLv2 or later at the time
| she made her contribution, then a reasonably implication is that she
| consented to her contributions being distributed under those terms.
|
| > - Do such files need any clean up, for example should we add GPL
| > headers to them, or is this not needed?
|
| If the project as a whole is licensed under clear terms, you need not
| identify those same terms in each file, although there is no harm in
| doing so.
|
| > - There are other files, which include both a GPL license header
| > _plus_ some copyright note with an "All Rights Reserved" clause. It
| > has been my understanding that this is a conflict, and me must ask
| > the copyright holders to remove such "All Rights Reserved" clauses.
| > But then, some people claim that "All Rights Reserved" is a no-op
| > nowadays. License checking tools (like OSLC) seem to indicate this is
| > a problem, but then we see quite a lot of "All rights reserved" in
| > BSD-licensed files in gcc and glibc. So what is the correct way to
| > deal with such files?
|
| It is not a conflict to grant a license and also reserve all rights, as
| implicit in that language is that you are reserving all "other" rights
| not granted in the license. Thus, a file with "Licensed under GPL, All
| Rights Reserved" would mean that it is licensed under the GPL, but no
| other rights are given to copy, modify or redistribute it.
|
| Warm regards,
| --Dan
|
| Daniel B. Ravicher, Legal Director
| Software Freedom Law Center (SFLC) and Moglen Ravicher LLC
| 1995 Broadway, 17th Fl., New York, NY 10023
| (212) 461-1902 direct (212) 580-0800 main (212) 580-0898 fax
| ravicher@softwarefreedom.org www.softwarefreedom.org
[1] http://spdx.org/
[2] http://spdx.org/licenses/
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
2013-06-21 08:22:36 +00:00
|
|
|
# (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
# Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Summary:
|
|
|
|
========
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for
|
2004-10-17 21:12:06 +00:00
|
|
|
Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other
|
|
|
|
processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to
|
|
|
|
initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application
|
|
|
|
code.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some
|
|
|
|
header files in common, and special provision has been made to
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
support booting of Linux images.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some attention has been paid to make this software easily
|
|
|
|
configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are
|
|
|
|
implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to
|
|
|
|
add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used
|
|
|
|
code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can
|
|
|
|
load and run it dynamically.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Status:
|
|
|
|
=======
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
"working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
In case of problems see the CHANGELOG file to find out who contributed
|
|
|
|
the specific port. In addition, there are various MAINTAINERS files
|
|
|
|
scattered throughout the U-Boot source identifying the people or
|
|
|
|
companies responsible for various boards and subsystems.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: As of August, 2010, there is no longer a CHANGELOG file in the
|
|
|
|
actual U-Boot source tree; however, it can be created dynamically
|
|
|
|
from the Git log using:
|
2012-11-14 02:03:20 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
make CHANGELOG
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Where to get help:
|
|
|
|
==================
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot, you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at
|
2008-09-10 14:18:34 +00:00
|
|
|
<u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic
|
|
|
|
on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's.
|
2020-10-08 04:16:18 +00:00
|
|
|
Please see https://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and
|
|
|
|
https://marc.info/?l=u-boot
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Where to get source code:
|
|
|
|
=========================
|
|
|
|
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
The U-Boot source code is maintained in the Git repository at
|
2021-02-24 12:19:04 +00:00
|
|
|
https://source.denx.de/u-boot/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at
|
|
|
|
https://source.denx.de/u-boot/u-boot
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2020-10-08 04:16:25 +00:00
|
|
|
The "Tags" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also
|
2020-10-08 04:16:25 +00:00
|
|
|
available from the DENX file server through HTTPS or FTP.
|
|
|
|
https://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/
|
|
|
|
ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Where we come from:
|
|
|
|
===================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- start from 8xxrom sources
|
2020-10-08 04:17:16 +00:00
|
|
|
- create PPCBoot project (https://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- clean up code
|
|
|
|
- make it easier to add custom boards
|
|
|
|
- make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs
|
|
|
|
- extend functions, especially:
|
|
|
|
* Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader
|
|
|
|
* S-Record download
|
|
|
|
* network boot
|
2019-08-01 15:47:14 +00:00
|
|
|
* ATA disk / SCSI ... boot
|
2020-10-08 04:17:16 +00:00
|
|
|
- create ARMBoot project (https://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- add other CPU families (starting with ARM)
|
2020-10-08 04:17:16 +00:00
|
|
|
- create U-Boot project (https://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot)
|
|
|
|
- current project page: see https://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Names and Spelling:
|
|
|
|
===================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling
|
|
|
|
"U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments
|
|
|
|
in source files etc.). Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is the README file for the U-Boot project.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#include <asm/u-boot.h>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on
|
|
|
|
the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U_BOOT_VERSION u_boot_logo
|
|
|
|
IH_OS_U_BOOT u_boot_hush_start
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-12-17 17:55:09 +00:00
|
|
|
Versioning:
|
|
|
|
===========
|
|
|
|
|
2010-09-28 06:06:25 +00:00
|
|
|
Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases
|
|
|
|
were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning
|
|
|
|
into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by
|
|
|
|
names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date.
|
|
|
|
Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix
|
|
|
|
releases in "stable" maintenance trees.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot v2009.11 - Release November 2009
|
2010-09-28 06:06:25 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot v2009.11.1 - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree
|
2016-10-30 16:30:30 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candidate 1 for September 2010 release
|
2002-12-17 17:55:09 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Directory Hierarchy:
|
|
|
|
====================
|
|
|
|
|
2021-07-11 03:14:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/arch Architecture-specific files
|
2014-03-07 09:02:02 +00:00
|
|
|
/arc Files generic to ARC architecture
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/arm Files generic to ARM architecture
|
|
|
|
/m68k Files generic to m68k architecture
|
|
|
|
/microblaze Files generic to microblaze architecture
|
|
|
|
/mips Files generic to MIPS architecture
|
2011-10-19 20:41:11 +00:00
|
|
|
/nds32 Files generic to NDS32 architecture
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/nios2 Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
/powerpc Files generic to PowerPC architecture
|
2017-12-26 05:55:59 +00:00
|
|
|
/riscv Files generic to RISC-V architecture
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
/sandbox Files generic to HW-independent "sandbox"
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/sh Files generic to SH architecture
|
2013-09-15 22:34:15 +00:00
|
|
|
/x86 Files generic to x86 architecture
|
2020-10-08 04:16:38 +00:00
|
|
|
/xtensa Files generic to Xtensa architecture
|
2021-07-11 03:14:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/api Machine/arch-independent API for external apps
|
|
|
|
/board Board-dependent files
|
2021-10-14 18:47:54 +00:00
|
|
|
/boot Support for images and booting
|
2016-08-26 11:54:49 +00:00
|
|
|
/cmd U-Boot commands functions
|
2021-07-11 03:14:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/common Misc architecture-independent functions
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
/configs Board default configuration files
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/disk Code for disk drive partition handling
|
2021-07-11 03:14:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/doc Documentation (a mix of ReST and READMEs)
|
|
|
|
/drivers Device drivers
|
|
|
|
/dts Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt.
|
|
|
|
/env Environment support
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/examples Example code for standalone applications, etc.
|
|
|
|
/fs Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.)
|
|
|
|
/include Header Files
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
/lib Library routines generic to all architectures
|
|
|
|
/Licenses Various license files
|
2010-04-13 03:28:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/net Networking code
|
|
|
|
/post Power On Self Test
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
/scripts Various build scripts and Makefiles
|
|
|
|
/test Various unit test files
|
2021-07-11 03:14:21 +00:00
|
|
|
/tools Tools to build and sign FIT images, etc.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Software Configuration:
|
|
|
|
=======================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the
|
|
|
|
rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are two classes of configuration variables:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Configuration _OPTIONS_:
|
|
|
|
These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with
|
|
|
|
"CONFIG_".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Configuration _SETTINGS_:
|
|
|
|
These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if
|
|
|
|
you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
"CONFIG_SYS_".
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Previously, all configuration was done by hand, which involved creating
|
|
|
|
symbolic links and editing configuration files manually. More recently,
|
|
|
|
U-Boot has added the Kbuild infrastructure used by the Linux kernel,
|
|
|
|
allowing you to use the "make menuconfig" command to configure your
|
|
|
|
build.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type:
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig".
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example: For a TQM823L module type:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
cd u-boot
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make TQM823L_defconfig
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: If you're looking for the default configuration file for a board
|
|
|
|
you're sure used to be there but is now missing, check the file
|
|
|
|
doc/README.scrapyard for a list of no longer supported boards.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-03-22 23:12:59 +00:00
|
|
|
Sandbox Environment:
|
|
|
|
--------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox'
|
|
|
|
board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture-
|
|
|
|
specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to
|
|
|
|
run some of U-Boot's tests.
|
|
|
|
|
2020-10-08 04:16:58 +00:00
|
|
|
See doc/arch/sandbox.rst for more details.
|
2014-03-22 23:12:59 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2015-03-03 15:03:00 +00:00
|
|
|
Board Initialisation Flow:
|
|
|
|
--------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is the intended start-up flow for boards. This should apply for both
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
SPL and U-Boot proper (i.e. they both follow the same rules).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: "SPL" stands for "Secondary Program Loader," which is explained in
|
|
|
|
more detail later in this file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At present, SPL mostly uses a separate code path, but the function names
|
|
|
|
and roles of each function are the same. Some boards or architectures
|
|
|
|
may not conform to this. At least most ARM boards which use
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK conform to this.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Execution typically starts with an architecture-specific (and possibly
|
|
|
|
CPU-specific) start.S file, such as:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- arch/arm/cpu/armv7/start.S
|
|
|
|
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc83xx/start.S
|
|
|
|
- arch/mips/cpu/start.S
|
2015-03-03 15:03:00 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
and so on. From there, three functions are called; the purpose and
|
|
|
|
limitations of each of these functions are described below.
|
2015-03-03 15:03:00 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
lowlevel_init():
|
|
|
|
- purpose: essential init to permit execution to reach board_init_f()
|
|
|
|
- no global_data or BSS
|
|
|
|
- there is no stack (ARMv7 may have one but it will soon be removed)
|
|
|
|
- must not set up SDRAM or use console
|
|
|
|
- must only do the bare minimum to allow execution to continue to
|
|
|
|
board_init_f()
|
|
|
|
- this is almost never needed
|
|
|
|
- return normally from this function
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
board_init_f():
|
|
|
|
- purpose: set up the machine ready for running board_init_r():
|
|
|
|
i.e. SDRAM and serial UART
|
|
|
|
- global_data is available
|
|
|
|
- stack is in SRAM
|
|
|
|
- BSS is not available, so you cannot use global/static variables,
|
|
|
|
only stack variables and global_data
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non-SPL-specific notes:
|
|
|
|
- dram_init() is called to set up DRAM. If already done in SPL this
|
|
|
|
can do nothing
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SPL-specific notes:
|
|
|
|
- you can override the entire board_init_f() function with your own
|
|
|
|
version as needed.
|
|
|
|
- preloader_console_init() can be called here in extremis
|
|
|
|
- should set up SDRAM, and anything needed to make the UART work
|
2020-09-24 06:57:19 +00:00
|
|
|
- there is no need to clear BSS, it will be done by crt0.S
|
2019-08-08 17:54:49 +00:00
|
|
|
- for specific scenarios on certain architectures an early BSS *can*
|
|
|
|
be made available (via CONFIG_SPL_EARLY_BSS by moving the clearing
|
|
|
|
of BSS prior to entering board_init_f()) but doing so is discouraged.
|
|
|
|
Instead it is strongly recommended to architect any code changes
|
|
|
|
or additions such to not depend on the availability of BSS during
|
|
|
|
board_init_f() as indicated in other sections of this README to
|
|
|
|
maintain compatibility and consistency across the entire code base.
|
2015-03-03 15:03:00 +00:00
|
|
|
- must return normally from this function (don't call board_init_r()
|
|
|
|
directly)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here the BSS is cleared. For SPL, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined, then at
|
|
|
|
this point the stack and global_data are relocated to below
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR. For non-SPL, U-Boot is relocated to run at the top of
|
|
|
|
memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
board_init_r():
|
|
|
|
- purpose: main execution, common code
|
|
|
|
- global_data is available
|
|
|
|
- SDRAM is available
|
|
|
|
- BSS is available, all static/global variables can be used
|
|
|
|
- execution eventually continues to main_loop()
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non-SPL-specific notes:
|
|
|
|
- U-Boot is relocated to the top of memory and is now running from
|
|
|
|
there.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SPL-specific notes:
|
|
|
|
- stack is optionally in SDRAM, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR points into SDRAM
|
|
|
|
- preloader_console_init() can be called here - typically this is
|
2017-05-03 09:13:32 +00:00
|
|
|
done by selecting CONFIG_SPL_BOARD_INIT and then supplying a
|
2015-03-03 15:03:00 +00:00
|
|
|
spl_board_init() function containing this call
|
|
|
|
- loads U-Boot or (in falcon mode) Linux
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Configuration Options:
|
|
|
|
----------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all
|
|
|
|
such information is kept in a configuration file
|
|
|
|
"include/configs/<board_name>.h".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in
|
|
|
|
"include/configs/TQM823L.h".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux
|
|
|
|
kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to
|
|
|
|
build a config tool - later.
|
|
|
|
|
2017-08-11 05:39:14 +00:00
|
|
|
- ARM Platform Bus Type(CCI):
|
|
|
|
CoreLink Cache Coherent Interconnect (CCI) is ARM BUS which
|
|
|
|
provides full cache coherency between two clusters of multi-core
|
|
|
|
CPUs and I/O coherency for devices and I/O masters
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCI400
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defined For SoC that has cache coherent interconnect
|
|
|
|
CCN-400
|
2002-11-10 22:06:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2017-08-18 05:24:36 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCN504
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defined for SoC that has cache coherent interconnect CCN-504
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
The following options need to be configured:
|
|
|
|
|
2007-08-10 18:28:25 +00:00
|
|
|
- CPU Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Board Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS.
|
2006-10-24 12:42:37 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-02-18 11:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
- 85xx CPU Options:
|
2012-10-08 07:44:30 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PPC64
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements
|
|
|
|
the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR
|
|
|
|
compliance, among other possible reasons.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-02-18 11:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the
|
|
|
|
system clock. On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ
|
|
|
|
devices it can be 16 or 32. The ratio varies from SoC to Soc.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-05-20 05:39:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device
|
|
|
|
tree nodes for the given platform.
|
|
|
|
|
powerpc/fsl-corenet: work around erratum A004510
Erratum A004510 says that under certain load conditions, modified
cache lines can be discarded, causing data corruption.
To work around this, several CCSR and DCSR register updates need to be
made in a careful manner, so that there is no other transaction in
corenet when the update is made.
The update is made from a locked cacheline, with a delay before to flush
any previous activity, and a delay after to flush the CCSR/DCSR update.
We can't use a readback because that would be another corenet
transaction, which is not allowed.
We lock the subsequent cacheline to prevent it from being fetched while
we're executing the previous cacheline. It is filled with nops so that a
branch doesn't cause us to fetch another cacheline.
Ordinarily we are running in a cache-inhibited mapping at this point, so
we temporarily change that. We make it guarded so that we should never
see a speculative load, and we never do an explicit load. Thus, only the
I-cache should ever fill from this mapping, and we flush/unlock it
afterward. Thus we should avoid problems from any potential cache
aliasing between inhibited and non-inhibited mappings.
NOTE that if PAMU is used with this patch, it will need to use a
dedicated LAW as described in the erratum. This is the responsibility
of the OS that sets up PAMU.
Signed-off-by: Scott Wood <scottwood@freescale.com>
Signed-off-by: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com>
2012-08-14 10:14:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables a workaround for erratum A004510. If set,
|
|
|
|
then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR)
|
|
|
|
for which the A004510 workaround should be applied.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision
|
|
|
|
of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus
|
|
|
|
p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls
|
|
|
|
whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about
|
|
|
|
this erratum.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-16 07:57:44 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND
|
|
|
|
Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
required during NOR boot.
|
2013-04-16 07:57:44 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-10-29 17:03:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_A008044_WORKAROUND
|
|
|
|
Enables a workaround for T1040/T1042 erratum A008044. It is only
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
required during NAND boot and valid for Rev 1.0 SoC revision
|
2014-10-29 17:03:09 +00:00
|
|
|
|
powerpc/fsl-corenet: work around erratum A004510
Erratum A004510 says that under certain load conditions, modified
cache lines can be discarded, causing data corruption.
To work around this, several CCSR and DCSR register updates need to be
made in a careful manner, so that there is no other transaction in
corenet when the update is made.
The update is made from a locked cacheline, with a delay before to flush
any previous activity, and a delay after to flush the CCSR/DCSR update.
We can't use a readback because that would be another corenet
transaction, which is not allowed.
We lock the subsequent cacheline to prevent it from being fetched while
we're executing the previous cacheline. It is filled with nops so that a
branch doesn't cause us to fetch another cacheline.
Ordinarily we are running in a cache-inhibited mapping at this point, so
we temporarily change that. We make it guarded so that we should never
see a speculative load, and we never do an explicit load. Thus, only the
I-cache should ever fill from this mapping, and we flush/unlock it
afterward. Thus we should avoid problems from any potential cache
aliasing between inhibited and non-inhibited mappings.
NOTE that if PAMU is used with this patch, it will need to use a
dedicated LAW as described in the erratum. This is the responsibility
of the OS that sets up PAMU.
Signed-off-by: Scott Wood <scottwood@freescale.com>
Signed-off-by: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com>
2012-08-14 10:14:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600
|
|
|
|
according to the A004510 workaround.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-07-02 03:51:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR
|
|
|
|
This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is
|
|
|
|
connected exclusively to the DSP cores.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-04 04:01:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR
|
|
|
|
This value denotes start offset of M2 memory
|
|
|
|
which is directly connected to the DSP core.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-07-02 03:51:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR
|
|
|
|
This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly
|
|
|
|
connected to the DSP core.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-04 04:01:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT
|
|
|
|
This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-12-17 08:55:52 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK
|
|
|
|
Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's.
|
|
|
|
In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply
|
|
|
|
clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-18 18:10:26 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F
|
|
|
|
This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the
|
2016-02-06 03:30:11 +00:00
|
|
|
time of U-Boot entry and is required to be re-initialized.
|
2014-03-18 18:10:26 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-04-17 07:33:46 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
Indicates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is
|
2014-04-17 07:33:46 +00:00
|
|
|
supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-04-02 02:57:56 +00:00
|
|
|
- Generic CPU options:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those
|
|
|
|
values is arch specific.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-30 16:22:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is
|
2021-05-15 01:34:26 +00:00
|
|
|
found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx as well as some ARM core SoCs.
|
2013-09-30 16:22:09 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU
|
|
|
|
Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as
|
|
|
|
deskew training are not available.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR1 controller.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR2 controller.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR3 controller.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-28 00:54:47 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR4 controller.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-30 21:20:51 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-30 16:22:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1
|
|
|
|
Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with
|
|
|
|
Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board
|
|
|
|
implemetation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2
|
2016-07-15 17:44:45 +00:00
|
|
|
Board config to use DDR2. It can be enabled for SoCs with
|
2013-09-30 16:22:09 +00:00
|
|
|
Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board
|
|
|
|
implementation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3
|
|
|
|
Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with
|
2014-03-28 00:54:47 +00:00
|
|
|
Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L
|
|
|
|
Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with
|
|
|
|
DDR3L controllers.
|
2013-09-30 16:22:09 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-01-18 06:58:30 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE
|
|
|
|
Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE
|
|
|
|
Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian
|
|
|
|
|
2017-02-02 09:31:26 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_CLK_DIV
|
|
|
|
Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to IFC controller).
|
|
|
|
|
2017-02-02 09:32:00 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_LBC_CLK_DIV
|
|
|
|
Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to eLBC controller).
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-10 21:59:42 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE
|
|
|
|
Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE
|
|
|
|
Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-10 21:59:43 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY
|
|
|
|
Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the
|
|
|
|
same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for all Power SoCs. But
|
|
|
|
it could be different for ARM SoCs.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-10 21:59:44 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B
|
|
|
|
DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special
|
|
|
|
interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape
|
|
|
|
SoCs with ARM core.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-01 22:51:00 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS
|
|
|
|
Number of controllers used as main memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS
|
|
|
|
Number of controllers used for other than main memory.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-11-09 11:12:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_DP_DDR
|
|
|
|
Defines the SoC has DP-DDR used for DPAA.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-09-09 06:20:31 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE
|
|
|
|
Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE
|
|
|
|
Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian
|
|
|
|
|
2011-07-27 11:22:39 +00:00
|
|
|
- MIPS CPU options:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack
|
|
|
|
pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before
|
|
|
|
relocation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq
|
|
|
|
XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to
|
|
|
|
be swapped if a flash programmer is used.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-02 00:44:39 +00:00
|
|
|
- ARM options:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not
|
|
|
|
clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-03-21 02:28:08 +00:00
|
|
|
COUNTER_FREQUENCY
|
|
|
|
Generic timer clock source frequency.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
COUNTER_FREQUENCY_REAL
|
|
|
|
Generic timer clock source frequency if the real clock is
|
|
|
|
different from COUNTER_FREQUENCY, and can only be determined
|
|
|
|
at run time.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-01-19 23:25:52 +00:00
|
|
|
- Tegra SoC options:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TEGRA_SUPPORT_NON_SECURE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Support executing U-Boot in non-secure (NS) mode. Certain
|
|
|
|
impossible actions will be skipped if the CPU is in NS mode,
|
|
|
|
such as ARM architectural timer initialization.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-10-09 20:09:04 +00:00
|
|
|
- Linux Kernel Interface:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES [relevant for MIPS only]
|
|
|
|
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
When transferring memsize parameter to Linux, some versions
|
2003-10-09 20:09:04 +00:00
|
|
|
expect it to be in bytes, others in MB.
|
|
|
|
Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-06-04 00:34:45 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
|
2005-10-12 23:45:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be
|
2007-03-31 16:23:51 +00:00
|
|
|
passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware
|
|
|
|
concepts).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
|
|
|
|
* New libfdt-based support
|
|
|
|
* Adds the "fdt" command
|
2007-08-10 19:34:14 +00:00
|
|
|
* The bootm command automatically updates the fdt
|
2007-03-31 16:23:51 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2005-10-12 23:45:54 +00:00
|
|
|
OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC
|
|
|
|
addresses
|
2007-08-10 19:34:14 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-10-24 00:58:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_SYSTEM_SETUP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other code has addition modification that it wants to make
|
|
|
|
to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel.
|
|
|
|
This causes ft_system_setup() to be called before booting
|
|
|
|
the kernel.
|
|
|
|
|
2009-09-23 05:56:08 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not.
|
|
|
|
If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot
|
|
|
|
removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux,
|
|
|
|
so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and
|
|
|
|
crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where
|
|
|
|
no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-11-03 21:13:47 +00:00
|
|
|
- vxWorks boot parameters:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following
|
2015-10-08 03:19:17 +00:00
|
|
|
environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask,
|
|
|
|
serverip, gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs.
|
2008-11-03 21:13:47 +00:00
|
|
|
It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile.
|
|
|
|
|
2020-10-08 04:17:08 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will override
|
2008-11-03 21:13:47 +00:00
|
|
|
the defaults discussed just above.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-06-16 23:30:51 +00:00
|
|
|
- Cache Configuration for ARM:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache
|
|
|
|
controller
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310
|
|
|
|
controller register space
|
|
|
|
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
- Serial Ports:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to
|
|
|
|
the clock speed of the UARTs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board,
|
|
|
|
define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported)
|
|
|
|
port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h
|
|
|
|
|
2014-04-09 19:38:46 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver.
|
|
|
|
Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Serial Download Echo Mode:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
|
|
|
|
If defined to 1, all characters received during a
|
|
|
|
serial download (using the "loads" command) are
|
|
|
|
echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal
|
|
|
|
emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take
|
|
|
|
time on others. This setting #define's the initial
|
|
|
|
value of the "loads_echo" environment variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2016-03-14 01:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
- Removal of commands
|
|
|
|
If no commands are needed to boot, you can disable
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMDLINE to remove them. In this case, the command line
|
|
|
|
will not be available, and when U-Boot wants to execute the
|
|
|
|
boot command (on start-up) it will call board_run_command()
|
|
|
|
instead. This can reduce image size significantly for very
|
|
|
|
simple boot procedures.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-23 23:50:31 +00:00
|
|
|
- Regular expression support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_REGEX
|
2013-10-04 15:43:24 +00:00
|
|
|
If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against
|
|
|
|
the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library,
|
|
|
|
which adds regex support to some commands, as for
|
|
|
|
example "env grep" and "setexpr".
|
2013-03-23 23:50:31 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Watchdog:
|
2021-04-14 07:18:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_WATCHDOG_FREQ
|
|
|
|
Some platforms automatically call WATCHDOG_RESET()
|
|
|
|
from the timer interrupt handler every
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_WATCHDOG_FREQ interrupts. If not set by the
|
|
|
|
board configuration file, a default of CONFIG_SYS_HZ/2
|
|
|
|
(i.e. 500) is used. Setting CONFIG_SYS_WATCHDOG_FREQ
|
|
|
|
to 0 disables calling WATCHDOG_RESET() from the timer
|
|
|
|
interrupt.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Real-Time Clock:
|
|
|
|
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the
|
|
|
|
following options:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563 - use Philips PCF8563 RTC
|
2011-10-24 06:44:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX - use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_MC146818 - use MC146818 RTC
|
2003-03-06 21:55:29 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS1307 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS1337 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC
|
2003-05-20 14:25:27 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS1338 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC
|
2014-07-21 09:06:16 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS1339 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC
|
2003-03-12 10:41:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS164x - use Dallas DS164x RTC
|
2008-03-15 14:40:26 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208 - use Intersil ISL1208 RTC
|
2004-06-09 17:34:58 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900 - use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC
|
2017-05-30 00:03:33 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC - Turn off the OSC output for DS1337
|
2011-03-28 07:24:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR - enable trickle charger on
|
|
|
|
RV3029 RTC.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface
|
|
|
|
must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-12-17 22:36:21 +00:00
|
|
|
- GPIO Support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PCA953X - use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO
|
|
|
|
|
2010-12-19 10:12:13 +00:00
|
|
|
The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of
|
|
|
|
chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of
|
|
|
|
pins supported by a particular chip.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-12-17 22:36:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface
|
|
|
|
must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-06-12 05:29:41 +00:00
|
|
|
- I/O tracing:
|
|
|
|
When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O
|
|
|
|
accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out
|
|
|
|
to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is
|
|
|
|
useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that
|
|
|
|
the driver behaves the same way before and after a code
|
|
|
|
change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To
|
|
|
|
add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>'
|
|
|
|
to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below.
|
|
|
|
Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will
|
|
|
|
still continue to operate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
iotrace is enabled
|
|
|
|
Start: 10000000 (buffer start address)
|
|
|
|
Size: 00010000 (buffer size)
|
|
|
|
Offset: 00000120 (current buffer offset)
|
|
|
|
Output: 10000120 (start + offset)
|
|
|
|
Count: 00000018 (number of trace records)
|
|
|
|
CRC32: 9526fb66 (CRC32 of all trace records)
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Timestamp Support:
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp
|
|
|
|
(date and time) of an image is printed by image
|
|
|
|
commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE .
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-08-16 06:20:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported:
|
|
|
|
Zero or more of the following:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION Apple's MacOS partition table.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION GPT partition table, common when EFI is the
|
|
|
|
bootloader. Note 2TB partition limit; see
|
|
|
|
disk/part_efi.c
|
2016-05-01 17:36:02 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI) you must configure support for at
|
2012-08-16 06:20:15 +00:00
|
|
|
least one non-MTD partition type as well.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- IDE Reset method:
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will
|
|
|
|
be performed by calling the function
|
|
|
|
ide_set_reset(int reset)
|
|
|
|
which has to be defined in a board specific file
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- ATAPI Support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_ATAPI
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set this to enable ATAPI support.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-03-13 23:29:43 +00:00
|
|
|
- LBA48 Support
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_LBA48
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB
|
2009-12-03 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA.
|
2004-03-13 23:29:43 +00:00
|
|
|
Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only'
|
|
|
|
support disks up to 2.1TB.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA:
|
2004-03-13 23:29:43 +00:00
|
|
|
When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses.
|
|
|
|
Default is 32bit.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- SCSI Support:
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID *
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target
|
|
|
|
devices.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-10-04 15:43:24 +00:00
|
|
|
The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of
|
|
|
|
SCSI devices found during the last scan.
|
2012-10-29 05:23:48 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- NETWORK Support (PCI):
|
e1000: Allow direct access to the E1000 SPI EEPROM device
As a part of the manufacturing process for some of our custom hardware,
we are programming the EEPROMs attached to our Intel 82571EB controllers
from software using U-Boot and Linux.
This code provides several conditionally-compiled features to assist in
our manufacturing process:
CONFIG_CMD_E1000:
This is a basic "e1000" command which allows querying the controller
and (if other config options are set) performing EEPROM programming.
In particular, with CONFIG_E1000_SPI this allows you to display a
hex-dump of the EEPROM, copy to/from main memory, and verify/update
the software checksum.
CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC:
Build a generic SPI driver providing the standard U-Boot SPI driver
interface. This allows commands such as "sspi" to access the bus
attached to the E1000 controller. Additionally, some E1000 chipsets
can support user data in a reserved space in the E1000 EEPROM which
could be used for U-Boot environment storage.
CONFIG_E1000_SPI:
The core SPI access code used by the above interfaces.
For example, the following commands allow you to program the EEPROM from
a USB device (assumes CONFIG_E1000_SPI and CONFIG_CMD_E1000 are enabled):
usb start
fatload usb 0 $loadaddr 82571EB_No_Mgmt_Discrete-LOM.bin
e1000 0 spi program $loadaddr 0 1024
e1000 0 spi checksum update
Please keep in mind that the Intel-provided .eep files are organized as
16-bit words. When converting them to binary form for programming you
must byteswap each 16-bit word so that it is in little-endian form.
This means that when reading and writing words to the SPI EEPROM, the
bit ordering for each word looks like this on the wire:
Time >>>
------------------------------------------------------------------
... [7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8], ...
------------------------------------------------------------------
(MSB is 15, LSB is 0).
Signed-off-by: Kyle Moffett <Kyle.D.Moffett@boeing.com>
Cc: Ben Warren <biggerbadderben@gmail.com>
2011-10-18 11:05:29 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_E1000_SPI
|
|
|
|
Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x.
|
|
|
|
This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one
|
|
|
|
of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_NATSEMI
|
|
|
|
Support for National dp83815 chips.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NS8382X
|
|
|
|
Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-05-12 21:50:16 +00:00
|
|
|
- NETWORK Support (other):
|
2011-12-15 11:15:49 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC
|
|
|
|
Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-15 06:20:47 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LAN91C96
|
2003-05-12 21:50:16 +00:00
|
|
|
Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable 32 bit addressing
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-15 06:20:47 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC91111
|
2004-06-09 13:37:52 +00:00
|
|
|
Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE
|
|
|
|
Define this to hold the physical address
|
|
|
|
of the device (I/O space)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT
|
|
|
|
Define this if data bus is 32 bits
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS
|
|
|
|
Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros
|
|
|
|
(some hardware wont work with macros)
|
|
|
|
|
2011-11-15 15:00:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT
|
|
|
|
Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs.
|
|
|
|
|
2010-12-21 08:59:46 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_FTGMAC100
|
|
|
|
Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA
|
|
|
|
Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY.
|
|
|
|
Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY.
|
|
|
|
If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur
|
|
|
|
wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or
|
|
|
|
useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit
|
|
|
|
control registers. This behavior won't affect the
|
|
|
|
correctnessof 10/100 link speed update.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-01-27 01:06:03 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_ETHER
|
|
|
|
Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT
|
|
|
|
Define the number of ports to be used
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR
|
|
|
|
Define the ETH PHY's address
|
|
|
|
|
2011-01-27 01:06:08 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK
|
|
|
|
If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-17 08:36:14 +00:00
|
|
|
- TPM Support:
|
2013-04-12 11:04:34 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM
|
|
|
|
Support TPM devices.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-10-06 20:54:41 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_INFINEON
|
|
|
|
Support for Infineon i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device
|
2013-04-12 11:04:37 +00:00
|
|
|
per system is supported at this time.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION
|
|
|
|
Define the burst count bytes upper limit
|
|
|
|
|
2016-01-21 22:27:13 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24
|
|
|
|
Support for STMicroelectronics TPM devices. Requires DM_TPM support.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_I2C
|
|
|
|
Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 I2C devices.
|
|
|
|
Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and I2C.
|
|
|
|
|
2016-01-21 22:27:14 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_SPI
|
|
|
|
Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 SPI devices.
|
|
|
|
Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and SPI.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-26 13:55:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI
|
|
|
|
Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-12 11:04:34 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC
|
2011-10-17 08:36:14 +00:00
|
|
|
Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device
|
|
|
|
per system is supported at this time.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS
|
|
|
|
Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped
|
|
|
|
to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at
|
|
|
|
0xfed40000.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-26 13:55:13 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides
|
|
|
|
functional interfaces to some TPM commands.
|
|
|
|
Requires support for a TPM device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library.
|
|
|
|
Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- USB Support:
|
|
|
|
At the moment only the UHCI host controller is
|
2017-06-14 03:49:40 +00:00
|
|
|
supported (PIP405, MIP405); define
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it.
|
|
|
|
define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard
|
2004-10-09 22:44:59 +00:00
|
|
|
and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
storage devices.
|
|
|
|
Note:
|
|
|
|
Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives
|
|
|
|
(TEAC FD-05PUB).
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-02-27 10:52:47 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the
|
|
|
|
txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-02 04:51:25 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_DWC2_REG_ADDR the physical CPU address of the DWC2
|
|
|
|
HW module registers.
|
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- USB Device:
|
|
|
|
Define the below if you wish to use the USB console.
|
|
|
|
Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the
|
|
|
|
command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty
|
|
|
|
can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device.
|
|
|
|
If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate
|
|
|
|
a Linux host by
|
|
|
|
# modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID
|
|
|
|
else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment
|
|
|
|
variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following
|
|
|
|
might be defined in YourBoardName.h
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_DEVICE
|
|
|
|
Define this to build a UDC device
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_TTY
|
|
|
|
Define this to have a tty type of device available to
|
|
|
|
talk to the UDC device
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-03-26 10:08:06 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_HS
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable the high speed support for usb
|
|
|
|
device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine
|
|
|
|
int is_usbd_high_speed(void)
|
|
|
|
also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll
|
|
|
|
whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full
|
|
|
|
speed.
|
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot
|
|
|
|
should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER
|
|
|
|
Define this string as the name of your company for
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company"
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME
|
|
|
|
Define this string as the name of your product
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device"
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID
|
|
|
|
Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB
|
|
|
|
Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID
|
|
|
|
to avoid polluting the USB namespace.
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF
|
2006-06-14 16:14:56 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-06-14 15:45:53 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID
|
|
|
|
Define this as the unique Product ID
|
|
|
|
for your device
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF
|
2004-03-14 14:09:05 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-12-12 10:08:35 +00:00
|
|
|
- ULPI Layer Support:
|
|
|
|
The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via
|
|
|
|
the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY
|
|
|
|
via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and
|
|
|
|
the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based
|
|
|
|
viewport is supported.
|
|
|
|
To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file.
|
2012-09-30 22:44:35 +00:00
|
|
|
If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the
|
|
|
|
standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to
|
|
|
|
the appropriate value in Hz.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-15 22:40:42 +00:00
|
|
|
- MMC Support:
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To
|
|
|
|
enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be
|
|
|
|
accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device
|
2003-06-15 22:40:42 +00:00
|
|
|
to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is
|
2007-06-12 00:03:39 +00:00
|
|
|
enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with
|
|
|
|
the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT.
|
2003-06-15 22:40:42 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-07-04 22:21:22 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_MMCIF
|
|
|
|
Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR
|
|
|
|
Define the base address of MMCIF registers
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK
|
|
|
|
Define the clock frequency for MMCIF
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-14 05:32:47 +00:00
|
|
|
- USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support:
|
2018-02-16 15:41:18 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DFU_OVER_USB
|
2013-03-14 05:32:47 +00:00
|
|
|
This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-14 05:32:52 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DFU_NAND
|
|
|
|
This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-17 19:45:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DFU_RAM
|
|
|
|
This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU.
|
|
|
|
Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but
|
|
|
|
allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage,
|
|
|
|
one that would help mostly the developer.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-06-12 04:05:51 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE
|
|
|
|
Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the
|
|
|
|
raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer
|
|
|
|
configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable
|
|
|
|
through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-03-14 05:32:48 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE
|
|
|
|
When updating files rather than the raw storage device,
|
|
|
|
we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write
|
|
|
|
the buffer once we've been given the whole file. Define
|
|
|
|
this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer.
|
|
|
|
Default is 4 MiB if undefined.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-18 07:09:56 +00:00
|
|
|
DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT
|
|
|
|
Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the
|
|
|
|
host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending
|
|
|
|
a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT
|
|
|
|
Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when
|
|
|
|
entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before
|
|
|
|
sending again an USB request to the device.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
- Journaling Flash filesystem support:
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS
|
2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00:00
|
|
|
Define these for a default partition on a NOR device
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Keyboard Support:
|
2015-11-11 17:05:47 +00:00
|
|
|
See Kconfig help for available keyboard drivers.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Video support:
|
2011-02-15 23:09:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable the Freescale DIU video driver. Reference boards for
|
2011-02-15 23:09:19 +00:00
|
|
|
SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU
|
|
|
|
support, and should also define these other macros:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO
|
|
|
|
|
2011-04-11 19:18:22 +00:00
|
|
|
The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment
|
|
|
|
variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during
|
2016-04-02 14:53:18 +00:00
|
|
|
boot. See the documentation file doc/README.video for a
|
2011-04-11 19:18:22 +00:00
|
|
|
description of this variable.
|
2011-02-15 23:09:19 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- LCD Support: CONFIG_LCD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD
|
|
|
|
display); also select one of the supported displays
|
|
|
|
by defining one of these:
|
|
|
|
|
2008-05-09 19:57:18 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00:00
|
|
|
NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00:00
|
|
|
NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480.
|
|
|
|
Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SHARP_16x9
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480.
|
|
|
|
Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_HLD1045
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
HLD1045 display, 640x480.
|
|
|
|
Active, color, single scan.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_OPTREX_BW
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Optrex CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5
|
|
|
|
or
|
|
|
|
Hitachi LMG6912RPFC-00T
|
|
|
|
or
|
|
|
|
Hitachi SP14Q002
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
320x240. Black & white.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-10-17 13:24:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT
|
|
|
|
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
Normally the LCD is page-aligned (typically 4KB). If this is
|
2012-10-17 13:24:54 +00:00
|
|
|
defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead.
|
|
|
|
For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE
|
|
|
|
here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on
|
|
|
|
a per-section basis.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2015-03-27 07:01:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sometimes, for example if the display is mounted in portrait
|
|
|
|
mode or even if it's mounted landscape but rotated by 180degree,
|
|
|
|
we need to rotate our content of the display relative to the
|
|
|
|
framebuffer, so that user can read the messages which are
|
|
|
|
printed out.
|
|
|
|
Once CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is defined, the lcd_console will be
|
|
|
|
initialized with a given rotation from "vl_rot" out of
|
|
|
|
"vidinfo_t" which is provided by the board specific code.
|
|
|
|
The value for vl_rot is coded as following (matching to
|
|
|
|
fbcon=rotate:<n> linux-kernel commandline):
|
|
|
|
0 = no rotation respectively 0 degree
|
|
|
|
1 = 90 degree rotation
|
|
|
|
2 = 180 degree rotation
|
|
|
|
3 = 270 degree rotation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is not defined, the console will be
|
|
|
|
initialized with 0degree rotation.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-09-28 15:11:16 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-06-06 21:51:03 +00:00
|
|
|
- MII/PHY support:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The clock frequency of the MII bus
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
|
|
|
|
reset before any MII register access is possible.
|
|
|
|
For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay
|
|
|
|
required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
|
|
|
|
command issued before MII status register can be read
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- IP address:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_IPADDR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define a default value for the IP address to use for
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
determined through e.g. bootp.
|
2011-10-26 10:21:22 +00:00
|
|
|
(Environment variable "ipaddr")
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Server IP address:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SERVERIP
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
server to contact when using the "tftboot" command.
|
2011-10-26 10:21:22 +00:00
|
|
|
(Environment variable "serverip")
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-10-26 10:21:22 +00:00
|
|
|
- Gateway IP address:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_GATEWAYIP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines a default value for the IP address of the
|
|
|
|
default router where packets to other networks are
|
|
|
|
sent to.
|
|
|
|
(Environment variable "gatewayip")
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Subnet mask:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NETMASK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or
|
|
|
|
routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP
|
|
|
|
address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be
|
|
|
|
forwarded through a router.
|
|
|
|
(Environment variable "netmask")
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- BOOTP Recovery Mode:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have many targets in a network that try to
|
|
|
|
boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all
|
|
|
|
systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same
|
|
|
|
moment (which would happen for instance at recovery
|
|
|
|
from a power failure, when all systems will try to
|
|
|
|
boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be
|
|
|
|
inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The
|
2007-08-06 21:21:05 +00:00
|
|
|
following delays are inserted then:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1st BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 1 sec
|
|
|
|
2nd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 2 sec
|
|
|
|
3rd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 4 sec
|
|
|
|
4th and following
|
|
|
|
BOOTP requests: delay 0 ... 8 sec
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-19 08:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The
|
|
|
|
server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and
|
|
|
|
U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of
|
|
|
|
an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses
|
|
|
|
aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP
|
|
|
|
ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to
|
|
|
|
respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it
|
|
|
|
takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that
|
|
|
|
time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order
|
|
|
|
to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these
|
|
|
|
retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of
|
|
|
|
IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this
|
|
|
|
cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding
|
|
|
|
requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers
|
|
|
|
from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00:00
|
|
|
- DHCP Advanced Options:
|
2007-07-10 03:08:34 +00:00
|
|
|
You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX
|
2012-05-23 07:59:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL
|
2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-07-28 14:56:13 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip
|
|
|
|
environment variable, not the BOOTP server.
|
2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-05-23 07:59:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found
|
|
|
|
after the configured retry count, the call will fail
|
|
|
|
instead of starting over. This can be used to fail over
|
|
|
|
to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server
|
|
|
|
is not available.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-25 22:43:57 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between
|
|
|
|
receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request".
|
|
|
|
This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't
|
|
|
|
respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an
|
|
|
|
AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed
|
|
|
|
to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003
|
|
|
|
DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at
|
|
|
|
least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope
|
|
|
|
that one of the retries will be successful but note that
|
|
|
|
the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than
|
|
|
|
this delay.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-05-23 08:00:12 +00:00
|
|
|
- Link-local IP address negotiation:
|
|
|
|
Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network
|
|
|
|
for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration.
|
|
|
|
This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed
|
|
|
|
to exist in all environments that the device must operate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See doc/README.link-local for more information.
|
|
|
|
|
2017-11-23 11:21:32 +00:00
|
|
|
- MAC address from environment variables
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
FDT_SEQ_MACADDR_FROM_ENV
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fix-up device tree with MAC addresses fetched sequentially from
|
|
|
|
environment variables. This config work on assumption that
|
|
|
|
non-usable ethernet node of device-tree are either not present
|
|
|
|
or their status has been marked as "disabled".
|
|
|
|
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
- CDP Options:
|
2004-04-18 17:39:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The device id used in CDP trigger frames.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address
|
|
|
|
of the device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A printf format string which contains the ascii name of
|
|
|
|
the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc.
|
2004-04-15 21:48:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities;
|
|
|
|
0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_VERSION
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
An ascii string containing the version of the software.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
An ascii string containing the name of the platform.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A 32bit integer sent on the trigger.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the
|
|
|
|
device in .1 of milliwatts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A byte containing the id of the VLAN.
|
|
|
|
|
2017-01-19 08:51:05 +00:00
|
|
|
- Status LED: CONFIG_LED_STATUS
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Several configurations allow to display the current
|
|
|
|
status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink
|
|
|
|
fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as
|
|
|
|
soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and
|
|
|
|
start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running
|
|
|
|
(supported by a status LED driver in the Linux
|
2017-01-19 08:51:05 +00:00
|
|
|
kernel). Defining CONFIG_LED_STATUS enables this
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
feature in U-Boot.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-11-07 23:03:50 +00:00
|
|
|
Additional options:
|
|
|
|
|
2017-01-19 08:51:05 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO
|
2013-11-07 23:03:50 +00:00
|
|
|
The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin.
|
|
|
|
In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a
|
2017-01-19 08:51:05 +00:00
|
|
|
status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO
|
2013-11-07 23:03:50 +00:00
|
|
|
to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-11-07 23:03:52 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE
|
|
|
|
Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which
|
|
|
|
case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and
|
|
|
|
GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state.
|
|
|
|
In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined
|
|
|
|
with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity.
|
|
|
|
|
2021-08-19 03:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
- I2C Support:
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES
|
2016-10-03 00:01:05 +00:00
|
|
|
Hold the number of i2c buses you want to use.
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS
|
|
|
|
define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware.
|
|
|
|
if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can
|
|
|
|
omit this define.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS
|
|
|
|
define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected
|
|
|
|
on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this
|
|
|
|
define.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
hold a list of buses you want to use, only used if
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example
|
|
|
|
a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES {{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
|
|
|
|
{1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \
|
|
|
|
{1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
which defines
|
|
|
|
bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1
|
|
|
|
bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2
|
|
|
|
bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3
|
|
|
|
bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4
|
|
|
|
bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1
|
|
|
|
bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2
|
2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define.
|
|
|
|
|
2017-05-13 03:10:00 +00:00
|
|
|
- Legacy I2C Support:
|
2013-01-29 07:53:15 +00:00
|
|
|
If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT)
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
then the following macros need to be defined (examples are
|
|
|
|
from include/configs/lwmon.h):
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
I2C_INIT
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
(Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
controller or configure ports.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SCL)
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_ACTIVE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The code necessary to make the I2C data line active
|
|
|
|
(driven). If the data line is open collector, this
|
|
|
|
define can be null.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SDA)
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_TRISTATE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated
|
|
|
|
(inactive). If the data line is open collector, this
|
|
|
|
define can be null.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA)
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_READ
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-01 18:29:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high,
|
|
|
|
false if it is low.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_SDA(bit)
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-01 18:29:11 +00:00
|
|
|
If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it
|
|
|
|
is false, it clears it (low).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \
|
2003-07-17 23:16:40 +00:00
|
|
|
if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SDA; \
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_SCL(bit)
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-01 18:29:11 +00:00
|
|
|
If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it
|
|
|
|
is false, it clears it (low).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \
|
2003-07-17 23:16:40 +00:00
|
|
|
if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SCL; \
|
2004-02-06 23:19:44 +00:00
|
|
|
else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
I2C_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this
|
|
|
|
controls the rate of data transfer. The data rate thus
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something
|
2003-07-16 21:53:01 +00:00
|
|
|
like:
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-30 16:24:52 +00:00
|
|
|
#define I2C_DELAY udelay(2)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-07-21 17:38:02 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h),
|
|
|
|
then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be
|
|
|
|
used as SCL / SDA. Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will
|
|
|
|
have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to
|
|
|
|
the generic GPIO functions.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD
|
2003-03-06 13:39:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer
|
|
|
|
chips might think that the current transfer is still
|
|
|
|
in progress. On some boards it is possible to access
|
|
|
|
the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the
|
|
|
|
processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin
|
|
|
|
connected to the bus. If this option is defined a
|
|
|
|
custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c
|
|
|
|
is run early in the boot sequence.
|
2003-03-06 13:39:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
must have a controller. At any point in time, only one bus is
|
|
|
|
active. To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command.
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that bus numbering is zero-based.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
when the 'i2c probe' command is issued. If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
|
2009-04-19 03:34:03 +00:00
|
|
|
is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs. Otherwise, specify
|
|
|
|
a 1D array of device addresses
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
e.g.
|
|
|
|
#undef CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68}
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
|
2016-10-03 00:01:05 +00:00
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}}
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
|
2006-11-04 01:15:00 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD.
|
|
|
|
If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM
|
2007-02-20 09:51:26 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC.
|
|
|
|
If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-12-29 23:36:01 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
defining this will force the i2c_read() function in
|
|
|
|
the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start
|
|
|
|
between writing the address pointer and reading the
|
|
|
|
data. If this define is omitted the default behaviour
|
|
|
|
of doing a stop-start sequence will be used. Most I2C
|
|
|
|
devices can use either method, but some require one or
|
|
|
|
the other.
|
2006-11-04 01:15:00 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- SPI Support: CONFIG_SPI
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with
|
|
|
|
SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and
|
|
|
|
D/As on the SACSng board)
|
|
|
|
|
2014-07-14 08:22:11 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT
|
|
|
|
Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed.
|
|
|
|
default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100) /* 10 ms */
|
|
|
|
|
2007-12-27 16:12:34 +00:00
|
|
|
- FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-12-27 16:12:34 +00:00
|
|
|
Enables FPGA subsystem.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables support for specific chip vendors.
|
|
|
|
(ALTERA, XILINX)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-12-27 16:12:34 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_FPGA_<family>
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2007-12-27 16:12:34 +00:00
|
|
|
Enables support for FPGA family.
|
|
|
|
(SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specify the number of FPGA devices to support.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy
|
|
|
|
status by the configuration function. This option
|
|
|
|
will require a board or device specific function to
|
|
|
|
be written.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA
|
|
|
|
configuration driver.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile
|
|
|
|
loading. For example, abort during Virtex II
|
|
|
|
configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which
|
|
|
|
indicated a CRC error).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to de-assert
|
|
|
|
after PROB_B has been de-asserted during a Virtex II
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
ms.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum time to wait for BUSY to de-assert during
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
200 ms.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Vendor Parameter Protection:
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot considers the values of the environment
|
|
|
|
variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and
|
2003-09-05 23:19:14 +00:00
|
|
|
"ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and
|
|
|
|
protects these variables from casual modification by
|
|
|
|
the user. Once set, these variables are read-only,
|
|
|
|
and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
change this behaviour:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config
|
|
|
|
file, the write protection for vendor parameters is
|
2003-03-06 13:39:27 +00:00
|
|
|
completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
these parameters.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-05-04 19:55:14 +00:00
|
|
|
Alternatively, if you define _both_ an ethaddr in the
|
|
|
|
default env _and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Ethernet address is installed in the environment,
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The
|
|
|
|
serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains
|
|
|
|
read-only.]
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way
|
|
|
|
for any variable by configuring the type of access
|
|
|
|
to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable
|
|
|
|
or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- Protected RAM:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_PRAM
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define this variable to enable the reservation of
|
|
|
|
"protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten
|
|
|
|
by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of
|
|
|
|
kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite
|
|
|
|
this default value by defining an environment
|
|
|
|
variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to
|
|
|
|
reserve. Note that the board info structure will
|
|
|
|
still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is
|
|
|
|
reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will
|
|
|
|
automatically be defined to hold the amount of
|
|
|
|
remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot
|
|
|
|
argument to Linux, for instance like that:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-11-20 20:40:11 +00:00
|
|
|
setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem}
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
saveenv
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory,
|
|
|
|
either, which results in a memory region that will
|
|
|
|
not be affected by reboots.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic
|
|
|
|
detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that
|
|
|
|
this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the
|
|
|
|
following board configurations are known to be
|
|
|
|
"pRAM-clean":
|
|
|
|
|
2017-06-07 15:33:09 +00:00
|
|
|
IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx,
|
2012-10-24 02:36:15 +00:00
|
|
|
HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON,
|
2017-06-07 15:33:10 +00:00
|
|
|
FLAGADM
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Error Recovery:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
This variable defines the number of retries for
|
|
|
|
network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP
|
|
|
|
before giving up the operation. If not defined, a
|
|
|
|
default value of 5 is used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-04-03 15:04:19 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-07-03 22:25:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol.
|
|
|
|
If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command,
|
|
|
|
try longer timeout such as
|
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Note:
|
|
|
|
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
In the current implementation, the local variables
|
|
|
|
space and global environment variables space are
|
|
|
|
separated. Local variables are those you define by
|
|
|
|
simply typing `name=value'. To access a local
|
|
|
|
variable later on, you have write `$name' or
|
|
|
|
`${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable
|
|
|
|
directly type `$name' at the command prompt.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Global environment variables are those you use
|
|
|
|
setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored
|
|
|
|
in such a variable, you need to use the run command,
|
|
|
|
and you must not use the '$' sign to access them.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To store commands and special characters in a
|
|
|
|
variable, please use double quotation marks
|
|
|
|
surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead
|
|
|
|
of the backslashes before semicolons and special
|
|
|
|
symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
- Command Line Editing and History:
|
2016-01-27 03:47:55 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_CMDLINE_PS_SUPPORT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable support for changing the command prompt string
|
|
|
|
at run-time. Only static string is supported so far.
|
|
|
|
The string is obtained from environment variables PS1
|
|
|
|
and PS2.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-12-06 19:49:23 +00:00
|
|
|
- Default Environment:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Define this to contain any number of null terminated
|
|
|
|
strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of
|
2003-09-05 23:19:14 +00:00
|
|
|
the default environment compiled into the boot image.
|
2002-11-18 00:14:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
For example, place something like this in your
|
|
|
|
board's config file:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \
|
|
|
|
"myvar1=value1\0" \
|
|
|
|
"myvar2=value2\0"
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the
|
|
|
|
internal format how the environment is stored by the
|
|
|
|
U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported
|
|
|
|
interface! Although it is unlikely that this format
|
2003-09-05 23:19:14 +00:00
|
|
|
will change soon, there is no guarantee either.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
You better know what you are doing here.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is
|
|
|
|
discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset
|
2009-04-01 21:34:12 +00:00
|
|
|
the environment like the "source" command or the
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
boot command first.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-11-30 13:01:17 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normally the environment is loaded when the board is
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
initialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits
|
2012-11-30 13:01:17 +00:00
|
|
|
that so that the environment is not available until
|
|
|
|
explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
|
|
|
|
this is instead controlled by the value of
|
|
|
|
/config/load-environment.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-09-24 20:37:32 +00:00
|
|
|
- TFTP Fixed UDP Port:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TFTP_PORT
|
|
|
|
|
2005-09-24 21:25:46 +00:00
|
|
|
If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp
|
2005-09-24 20:37:32 +00:00
|
|
|
is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value.
|
2005-09-24 21:25:46 +00:00
|
|
|
If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port
|
2005-09-24 20:37:32 +00:00
|
|
|
number generator is used.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-09-24 21:25:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply
|
|
|
|
the TFTP UDP destination port value. If tftpdstp isn't
|
|
|
|
defined, the normal port 69 is used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to
|
2005-09-24 20:37:32 +00:00
|
|
|
blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured
|
|
|
|
target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of
|
|
|
|
"punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing
|
|
|
|
the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally.
|
|
|
|
A better solution is to properly configure the firewall,
|
|
|
|
but sometimes that is not allowed.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-09 19:06:34 +00:00
|
|
|
This option defines a board specific value for the
|
|
|
|
address where standalone program gets loaded, thus
|
|
|
|
overwriting the architecture dependent default
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
settings.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Frame Buffer Address:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_FB_ADDR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific
|
2013-01-03 00:43:59 +00:00
|
|
|
address for frame buffer. This is typically the case
|
|
|
|
when using a graphics controller has separate video
|
|
|
|
memory. U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at
|
|
|
|
the given address instead of dynamically reserving it
|
|
|
|
in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs
|
|
|
|
the memory for the frame buffer depending on the
|
|
|
|
configured panel size.
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please see board_init_f function.
|
|
|
|
|
2009-12-01 16:16:19 +00:00
|
|
|
- Automatic software updates via TFTP server
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
These options enable and control the auto-update feature;
|
|
|
|
for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support)
|
2014-06-24 08:10:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD
|
|
|
|
This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest
|
|
|
|
erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks
|
|
|
|
of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing
|
|
|
|
wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase
|
|
|
|
counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and
|
|
|
|
other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more.
|
|
|
|
However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock
|
|
|
|
life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g.,
|
|
|
|
to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
default: 4096
|
2014-10-24 00:58:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-06-24 08:10:04 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT
|
|
|
|
This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI
|
|
|
|
expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the
|
|
|
|
underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR
|
|
|
|
flash), this value is ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM
|
|
|
|
(Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime.
|
|
|
|
The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks
|
|
|
|
then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)",
|
|
|
|
which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total
|
|
|
|
count of eraseblocks on the chip).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to
|
|
|
|
reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks
|
|
|
|
handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire
|
|
|
|
NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means
|
|
|
|
that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad
|
|
|
|
eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same
|
|
|
|
size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a
|
|
|
|
partition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
default: 20
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP
|
|
|
|
Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device
|
|
|
|
in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it
|
|
|
|
only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device.
|
|
|
|
The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach
|
|
|
|
the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where
|
|
|
|
attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install
|
|
|
|
a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note
|
|
|
|
that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations
|
|
|
|
without fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap
|
|
|
|
fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT
|
|
|
|
Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images
|
|
|
|
without a fastmap.
|
|
|
|
default: 0
|
|
|
|
|
2015-10-22 04:19:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FM_DEBUG
|
|
|
|
Enable UBI fastmap debug
|
|
|
|
default: 0
|
|
|
|
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- SPL framework
|
2011-09-11 19:24:09 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL
|
|
|
|
Enable building of SPL globally.
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT
|
|
|
|
Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included.
|
|
|
|
When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory
|
|
|
|
used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
|
2013-04-14 04:48:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
must not be both defined at the same time.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and
|
|
|
|
linker lists sections), BSS excluded.
|
|
|
|
When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does
|
|
|
|
not exceed it.
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-09-21 00:05:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE
|
|
|
|
Address to relocate to. If unspecified, this is equal to
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done).
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR
|
|
|
|
Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS.
|
|
|
|
When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used
|
|
|
|
by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
|
2013-04-14 04:48:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
|
2013-04-12 05:14:30 +00:00
|
|
|
must not be both defined at the same time.
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_STACK
|
|
|
|
Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use
|
|
|
|
|
2015-03-31 09:40:50 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_PANIC_ON_RAW_IMAGE
|
|
|
|
When defined, SPL will panic() if the image it has
|
|
|
|
loaded does not have a signature.
|
|
|
|
Defining this is useful when code which loads images
|
|
|
|
in SPL cannot guarantee that absolutely all read errors
|
|
|
|
will be caught.
|
|
|
|
An example is the LPC32XX MLC NAND driver, which will
|
|
|
|
consider that a completely unreadable NAND block is bad,
|
|
|
|
and thus should be skipped silently.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-09-21 00:05:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK
|
|
|
|
Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after
|
|
|
|
relocation. If unspecified, this is equal to
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_STACK.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START
|
|
|
|
Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL.
|
2015-11-12 14:30:19 +00:00
|
|
|
When this option is set the full malloc is used in SPL and
|
|
|
|
it is set up by spl_init() and before that, the simple malloc()
|
|
|
|
can be used if CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F is defined.
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE
|
|
|
|
The size of the malloc pool used in SPL.
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-08-13 18:37:56 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT
|
|
|
|
For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information
|
|
|
|
about the running system.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-09-20 21:35:21 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL
|
|
|
|
Arch init code should be built for a very small image
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-13 08:36:29 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR
|
|
|
|
Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being
|
|
|
|
used in raw mode (for Falcon mode)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS
|
|
|
|
Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument
|
|
|
|
parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode
|
|
|
|
(for falcon mode)
|
|
|
|
|
2014-10-15 15:53:13 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME
|
|
|
|
Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from filesystem
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME
|
2013-05-13 08:36:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading
|
2014-10-15 15:53:13 +00:00
|
|
|
from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
|
2013-05-13 08:36:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-10-15 15:53:13 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_ARGS_NAME
|
2013-05-13 08:36:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters
|
2014-10-15 15:53:13 +00:00
|
|
|
when reading from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
|
2013-05-13 08:36:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-12-06 13:33:17 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND
|
|
|
|
Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that
|
|
|
|
start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before
|
|
|
|
continuing (the hardware starts execution after just
|
|
|
|
loading the first page rather than the full 4K).
|
|
|
|
|
2014-04-08 13:42:31 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE
|
|
|
|
Avoid SPL relocation
|
|
|
|
|
2018-01-14 18:26:38 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_NAND_IDENT
|
|
|
|
SPL uses the chip ID list to identify the NAND flash.
|
|
|
|
Requires CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE.
|
|
|
|
|
2016-07-12 18:28:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_UBI
|
|
|
|
Support for a lightweight UBI (fastmap) scanner and
|
|
|
|
loader
|
|
|
|
|
2014-10-31 07:31:00 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_NAND_RAW_ONLY
|
|
|
|
Support to boot only raw u-boot.bin images. Use this only
|
|
|
|
if you need to save space.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-08-16 07:16:12 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR
|
|
|
|
Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in
|
|
|
|
SPL binary.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE,
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES
|
|
|
|
Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses
|
2012-09-21 23:35:27 +00:00
|
|
|
to read U-Boot
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-09-21 23:35:27 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST
|
|
|
|
Location in memory to load U-Boot to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE
|
|
|
|
Size of image to load
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START
|
2012-09-21 23:35:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Entry point in loaded image to jump to
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST
|
|
|
|
Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
data. This is used, for example, on davinci platforms.
|
2012-02-14 07:29:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-08-30 20:42:11 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE
|
|
|
|
Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary
|
2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-12-06 13:33:16 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO
|
2013-04-11 09:35:49 +00:00
|
|
|
Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending
|
|
|
|
the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
|
|
|
|
payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
|
2012-12-06 13:33:16 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-09-21 21:27:32 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_TARGET
|
|
|
|
Final target image containing SPL and payload. Some SPLs
|
|
|
|
use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for
|
|
|
|
example if more than one image needs to be produced.
|
|
|
|
|
2018-05-12 22:22:52 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_FIT_PRINT
|
2013-05-08 08:05:59 +00:00
|
|
|
Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of
|
|
|
|
code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this
|
|
|
|
option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the
|
|
|
|
bootm command when booting a FIT image.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-08-16 07:16:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- TPL framework
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPL
|
|
|
|
Enable building of TPL globally.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO
|
|
|
|
Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending
|
|
|
|
the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as
|
2013-10-04 15:43:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
|
|
|
|
payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
|
2013-08-16 07:16:15 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-12-06 19:49:23 +00:00
|
|
|
- Interrupt support (PPC):
|
|
|
|
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt()
|
|
|
|
for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu()
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu()
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
(ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero.
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU
|
2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00:00
|
|
|
specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led
|
|
|
|
/ other_activity_monitor it works automatically from
|
|
|
|
general timer_interrupt().
|
2003-12-06 19:49:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-10-20 04:19:47 +00:00
|
|
|
Board initialization settings:
|
|
|
|
------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions
|
|
|
|
to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup
|
|
|
|
before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the
|
|
|
|
following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is
|
|
|
|
architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c
|
|
|
|
typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r().
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f()
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r()
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init()
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init()
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Configuration Settings:
|
|
|
|
-----------------------
|
|
|
|
|
2019-12-28 17:45:10 +00:00
|
|
|
- MEM_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit.
|
2014-02-27 01:03:19 +00:00
|
|
|
Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included;
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
undefine this when you're short of memory.
|
|
|
|
|
2009-01-28 00:03:12 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default
|
|
|
|
width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT: This is what U-Boot prints on the console to
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
prompt for user input.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE: Buffer size for input from the Console
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE: Buffer size for Console output
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS: max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is
|
|
|
|
booted
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
List of legal baudrate settings for this board.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-12-04 19:57:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE
|
2016-06-24 23:46:18 +00:00
|
|
|
Only implemented for ARMv8 for now.
|
2015-12-04 19:57:07 +00:00
|
|
|
If defined, the size of CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE memory
|
|
|
|
is substracted from total RAM and won't be reported to OS.
|
|
|
|
This memory can be used as secure memory. A variable
|
2016-06-24 23:46:18 +00:00
|
|
|
gd->arch.secure_ram is used to track the location. In systems
|
2015-12-04 19:57:07 +00:00
|
|
|
the RAM base is not zero, or RAM is divided into banks,
|
|
|
|
this variable needs to be recalcuated to get the address.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-12-07 19:05:29 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE:
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header,
|
ppc: Add CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE option to hide memory area that doesn't get "touched"
If CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, this specified
memory area will get subtracted from the top (end) of ram and won't get
"touched" at all by U-Boot. By fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel
should gets passed the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it
either. This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux board
ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support, which recalculate the
memory size from the SDRAM controller setup, will have to get fixed
in Linux additionally.
This patch enables this config option on some PPC440EPx boards as a workaround
for the CHIP 11 errata. Here the description from the AMCC documentation:
CHIP_11: End of memory range area restricted access.
Category: 3
Overview:
The 440EPx DDR controller does not acknowledge any
transaction which is determined to be crossing over the
end-of-memory-range boundary, even if the starting address is
within valid memory space. Any such transaction from any PLB4
master will result in a PLB time-out on PLB4 bus.
Impact:
In case of such misaligned bursts, PLB4 masters will not
retrieve any data at all, just the available data up to the
end of memory, especially the 440 CPU. For example, if a CPU
instruction required an operand located in memory within the
last 7 words of memory, the DCU master would burst read 8
words to update the data cache and cross over the
end-of-memory-range boundary. Such a DCU read would not be
answered by the DDR controller, resulting in a PLB4 time-out
and ultimately in a Machine Check interrupt. The data would
be inaccessible to the CPU.
Workaround:
Forbid any application to access the last 256 bytes of DDR
memory. For example, make your operating system believe that
the last 256 bytes of DDR memory are absent. AMCC has a patch
that does this, available for Linux.
This patch sets CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE for the following 440EPx boards:
lwmon5, korat, sequoia
The other remaining 440EPx board were intentionally not included
since it is not clear to me, if they use the end of ram for some
other purpose. This is unclear, since these boards have CONFIG_PRAM
defined and even comments like this:
PMC440.h:
/* esd expects pram at end of physical memory.
* So no logbuffer at the moment.
*/
It is strongly recommended to not use the last 256 bytes on those
boards too. Patches from the board maintainers are welcome.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
2008-03-26 09:14:11 +00:00
|
|
|
this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
(end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By
|
ppc: Add CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE option to hide memory area that doesn't get "touched"
If CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, this specified
memory area will get subtracted from the top (end) of ram and won't get
"touched" at all by U-Boot. By fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel
should gets passed the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it
either. This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux board
ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support, which recalculate the
memory size from the SDRAM controller setup, will have to get fixed
in Linux additionally.
This patch enables this config option on some PPC440EPx boards as a workaround
for the CHIP 11 errata. Here the description from the AMCC documentation:
CHIP_11: End of memory range area restricted access.
Category: 3
Overview:
The 440EPx DDR controller does not acknowledge any
transaction which is determined to be crossing over the
end-of-memory-range boundary, even if the starting address is
within valid memory space. Any such transaction from any PLB4
master will result in a PLB time-out on PLB4 bus.
Impact:
In case of such misaligned bursts, PLB4 masters will not
retrieve any data at all, just the available data up to the
end of memory, especially the 440 CPU. For example, if a CPU
instruction required an operand located in memory within the
last 7 words of memory, the DCU master would burst read 8
words to update the data cache and cross over the
end-of-memory-range boundary. Such a DCU read would not be
answered by the DDR controller, resulting in a PLB4 time-out
and ultimately in a Machine Check interrupt. The data would
be inaccessible to the CPU.
Workaround:
Forbid any application to access the last 256 bytes of DDR
memory. For example, make your operating system believe that
the last 256 bytes of DDR memory are absent. AMCC has a patch
that does this, available for Linux.
This patch sets CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE for the following 440EPx boards:
lwmon5, korat, sequoia
The other remaining 440EPx board were intentionally not included
since it is not clear to me, if they use the end of ram for some
other purpose. This is unclear, since these boards have CONFIG_PRAM
defined and even comments like this:
PMC440.h:
/* esd expects pram at end of physical memory.
* So no logbuffer at the moment.
*/
It is strongly recommended to not use the last 256 bytes on those
boards too. Patches from the board maintainers are welcome.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
2008-03-26 09:14:11 +00:00
|
|
|
fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed
|
|
|
|
the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either.
|
|
|
|
This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux
|
2008-03-28 10:02:53 +00:00
|
|
|
board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that
|
ppc: Add CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE option to hide memory area that doesn't get "touched"
If CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, this specified
memory area will get subtracted from the top (end) of ram and won't get
"touched" at all by U-Boot. By fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel
should gets passed the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it
either. This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux board
ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support, which recalculate the
memory size from the SDRAM controller setup, will have to get fixed
in Linux additionally.
This patch enables this config option on some PPC440EPx boards as a workaround
for the CHIP 11 errata. Here the description from the AMCC documentation:
CHIP_11: End of memory range area restricted access.
Category: 3
Overview:
The 440EPx DDR controller does not acknowledge any
transaction which is determined to be crossing over the
end-of-memory-range boundary, even if the starting address is
within valid memory space. Any such transaction from any PLB4
master will result in a PLB time-out on PLB4 bus.
Impact:
In case of such misaligned bursts, PLB4 masters will not
retrieve any data at all, just the available data up to the
end of memory, especially the 440 CPU. For example, if a CPU
instruction required an operand located in memory within the
last 7 words of memory, the DCU master would burst read 8
words to update the data cache and cross over the
end-of-memory-range boundary. Such a DCU read would not be
answered by the DDR controller, resulting in a PLB4 time-out
and ultimately in a Machine Check interrupt. The data would
be inaccessible to the CPU.
Workaround:
Forbid any application to access the last 256 bytes of DDR
memory. For example, make your operating system believe that
the last 256 bytes of DDR memory are absent. AMCC has a patch
that does this, available for Linux.
This patch sets CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE for the following 440EPx boards:
lwmon5, korat, sequoia
The other remaining 440EPx board were intentionally not included
since it is not clear to me, if they use the end of ram for some
other purpose. This is unclear, since these boards have CONFIG_PRAM
defined and even comments like this:
PMC440.h:
/* esd expects pram at end of physical memory.
* So no logbuffer at the moment.
*/
It is strongly recommended to not use the last 256 bytes on those
boards too. Patches from the board maintainers are welcome.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
2008-03-26 09:14:11 +00:00
|
|
|
recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup
|
2008-03-28 10:02:53 +00:00
|
|
|
will have to get fixed in Linux additionally.
|
ppc: Add CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE option to hide memory area that doesn't get "touched"
If CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, this specified
memory area will get subtracted from the top (end) of ram and won't get
"touched" at all by U-Boot. By fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel
should gets passed the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it
either. This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux board
ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support, which recalculate the
memory size from the SDRAM controller setup, will have to get fixed
in Linux additionally.
This patch enables this config option on some PPC440EPx boards as a workaround
for the CHIP 11 errata. Here the description from the AMCC documentation:
CHIP_11: End of memory range area restricted access.
Category: 3
Overview:
The 440EPx DDR controller does not acknowledge any
transaction which is determined to be crossing over the
end-of-memory-range boundary, even if the starting address is
within valid memory space. Any such transaction from any PLB4
master will result in a PLB time-out on PLB4 bus.
Impact:
In case of such misaligned bursts, PLB4 masters will not
retrieve any data at all, just the available data up to the
end of memory, especially the 440 CPU. For example, if a CPU
instruction required an operand located in memory within the
last 7 words of memory, the DCU master would burst read 8
words to update the data cache and cross over the
end-of-memory-range boundary. Such a DCU read would not be
answered by the DDR controller, resulting in a PLB4 time-out
and ultimately in a Machine Check interrupt. The data would
be inaccessible to the CPU.
Workaround:
Forbid any application to access the last 256 bytes of DDR
memory. For example, make your operating system believe that
the last 256 bytes of DDR memory are absent. AMCC has a patch
that does this, available for Linux.
This patch sets CFG_MEM_TOP_HIDE for the following 440EPx boards:
lwmon5, korat, sequoia
The other remaining 440EPx board were intentionally not included
since it is not clear to me, if they use the end of ram for some
other purpose. This is unclear, since these boards have CONFIG_PRAM
defined and even comments like this:
PMC440.h:
/* esd expects pram at end of physical memory.
* So no logbuffer at the moment.
*/
It is strongly recommended to not use the last 256 bytes on those
boards too. Patches from the board maintainers are welcome.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>
2008-03-26 09:14:11 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx
|
|
|
|
CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't
|
|
|
|
be touched.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of
|
|
|
|
the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case,
|
|
|
|
then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a
|
|
|
|
non page size aligned address and this could cause major
|
|
|
|
problems.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Physical start address of Flash memory.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by
|
|
|
|
make config files to be same as the text base address
|
2010-10-07 19:51:12 +00:00
|
|
|
(CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN:
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to
|
|
|
|
determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is
|
|
|
|
embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate
|
|
|
|
flash sector.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-07-11 04:23:28 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN
|
|
|
|
Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If
|
|
|
|
this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation
|
|
|
|
will become available before relocation. The address is just
|
|
|
|
below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make
|
|
|
|
space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses
|
|
|
|
within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc()
|
|
|
|
is not available. free() is supported but does nothing.
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotten) when
|
2014-07-11 04:23:28 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot relocates itself.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-11-11 00:16:54 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_SIMPLE
|
|
|
|
Provides a simple and small malloc() and calloc() for those
|
|
|
|
boards which do not use the full malloc in SPL (which is
|
|
|
|
enabled with CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START).
|
|
|
|
|
2014-12-10 05:25:22 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_NONCACHED_MEMORY:
|
|
|
|
Size of non-cached memory area. This area of memory will be
|
|
|
|
typically located right below the malloc() area and mapped
|
|
|
|
uncached in the MMU. This is useful for drivers that would
|
|
|
|
otherwise require a lot of explicit cache maintenance. For
|
|
|
|
some drivers it's also impossible to properly maintain the
|
|
|
|
cache. For example if the regions that need to be flushed
|
|
|
|
are not a multiple of the cache-line size, *and* padding
|
|
|
|
cannot be allocated between the regions to align them (i.e.
|
|
|
|
if the HW requires a contiguous array of regions, and the
|
|
|
|
size of each region is not cache-aligned), then a flush of
|
|
|
|
one region may result in overwriting data that hardware has
|
|
|
|
written to another region in the same cache-line. This can
|
|
|
|
happen for example in network drivers where descriptors for
|
|
|
|
buffers are typically smaller than the CPU cache-line (e.g.
|
|
|
|
16 bytes vs. 32 or 64 bytes).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non-cached memory is only supported on 32-bit ARM at present.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN:
|
2006-03-13 10:16:36 +00:00
|
|
|
Normally compressed uImages are limited to an
|
|
|
|
uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough,
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file
|
2006-03-13 10:16:36 +00:00
|
|
|
to adjust this setting to your needs.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of
|
|
|
|
the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by
|
2008-04-14 13:44:16 +00:00
|
|
|
the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if
|
|
|
|
used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low"
|
2013-09-16 11:15:45 +00:00
|
|
|
environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case
|
2008-04-14 13:44:16 +00:00
|
|
|
all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low"
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. The environment
|
2011-03-28 09:58:43 +00:00
|
|
|
variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined,
|
|
|
|
then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-10-13 19:57:35 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH:
|
|
|
|
Enable initrd_high functionality. If defined then the
|
|
|
|
initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand
|
|
|
|
is enabled.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE:
|
|
|
|
Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between
|
|
|
|
"bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD:
|
|
|
|
Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in
|
|
|
|
space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Max number of Flash memory banks
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Max number of sectors on a Flash chip
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT
|
2003-07-14 22:13:32 +00:00
|
|
|
Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT
|
2003-07-14 22:13:32 +00:00
|
|
|
Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms)
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION
|
2003-07-14 22:13:32 +00:00
|
|
|
If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used
|
|
|
|
instead of U-Boot software protection.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory;
|
|
|
|
without this option such a download has to be
|
|
|
|
performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2)
|
|
|
|
copy from RAM to flash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since
|
|
|
|
you can check if the download worked before you erase
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is
|
|
|
|
too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
downloaded image) this option may be very useful.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI:
|
2003-03-06 00:02:04 +00:00
|
|
|
Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the
|
2004-02-08 22:55:38 +00:00
|
|
|
common flash structure for storing flash geometry.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-08-12 23:40:42 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER
|
2004-02-08 22:55:38 +00:00
|
|
|
This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver
|
|
|
|
in the drivers directory
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-11-17 14:57:58 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD
|
|
|
|
This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver
|
|
|
|
in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash
|
|
|
|
to the MTD layer.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE
|
2008-04-03 11:36:02 +00:00
|
|
|
Use buffered writes to flash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N
|
|
|
|
s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered
|
|
|
|
write commands.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST
|
2005-11-22 12:20:42 +00:00
|
|
|
If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't
|
|
|
|
print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This
|
|
|
|
is useful, if some of the configured banks are only
|
|
|
|
optionally available.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-08 18:48:01 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS
|
|
|
|
If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown
|
|
|
|
digits and dots. Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80
|
|
|
|
column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-04 13:53:14 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY
|
|
|
|
If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared
|
|
|
|
against the source after the write operation. An error message
|
|
|
|
will be printed when the contents are not identical.
|
|
|
|
Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases,
|
|
|
|
since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier
|
|
|
|
while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable
|
|
|
|
this option if you really know what you are doing.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER:
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some
|
|
|
|
Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value
|
2003-06-05 15:39:44 +00:00
|
|
|
to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all
|
|
|
|
buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
on high Ethernet traffic.
|
2003-06-05 15:39:44 +00:00
|
|
|
Defaults to 4 if not defined.
|
|
|
|
|
New implementation for internal handling of environment variables.
Motivation:
* Old environment code used a pessimizing implementation:
- variable lookup used linear search => slow
- changed/added variables were added at the end, i. e. most
frequently used variables had the slowest access times => slow
- each setenv() would calculate the CRC32 checksum over the whole
environment block => slow
* "redundant" envrionment was locked down to two copies
* No easy way to implement features like "reset to factory defaults",
or to select one out of several pre-defined (previously saved) sets
of environment settings ("profiles")
* No easy way to import or export environment settings
======================================================================
API Changes:
- Variable names starting with '#' are no longer allowed
I didn't find any such variable names being used; it is highly
recommended to follow standard conventions and start variable names
with an alphanumeric character
- "printenv" will now print a backslash at the end of all but the last
lines of a multi-line variable value.
Multi-line variables have never been formally defined, allthough
there is no reason not to use them. Now we define rules how to deal
with them, allowing for import and export.
- Function forceenv() and the related code in saveenv() was removed.
At the moment this is causing build problems for the only user of
this code (schmoogie - which has no entry in MAINTAINERS); may be
fixed later by implementing the "env set -f" feature.
Inconsistencies:
- "printenv" will '\\'-escape the '\n' in multi-line variables, while
"printenv var" will not do that.
======================================================================
Advantages:
- "printenv" output much better readable (sorted)
- faster!
- extendable (additional variable properties can be added)
- new, powerful features like "factory reset" or easy switching
between several different environment settings ("profiles")
Disadvantages:
- Image size grows by typically 5...7 KiB (might shrink a bit again on
systems with redundant environment with a following patch series)
======================================================================
Implemented:
- env command with subcommands:
- env print [arg ...]
same as "printenv": print environment
- env set [-f] name [arg ...]
same as "setenv": set (and delete) environment variables
["-f" - force setting even for read-only variables - not
implemented yet.]
- end delete [-f] name
not implemented yet
["-f" - force delete even for read-only variables]
- env save
same as "saveenv": save environment
- env export [-t | -b | -c] addr [size]
export internal representation (hash table) in formats usable for
persistent storage or processing:
-t: export as text format; if size is given, data will be
padded with '\0' bytes; if not, one terminating '\0'
will be added (which is included in the "filesize"
setting so you can for exmple copy this to flash and
keep the termination).
-b: export as binary format (name=value pairs separated by
'\0', list end marked by double "\0\0")
-c: export as checksum protected environment format as
used for example by "saveenv" command
addr: memory address where environment gets stored
size: size of output buffer
With "-c" and size is NOT given, then the export command will
format the data as currently used for the persistent storage,
i. e. it will use CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE as output block size and
prepend a valid CRC32 checksum and, in case of resundant
environment, a "current" redundancy flag. If size is given, this
value will be used instead of CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE; again, CRC32
checksum and redundancy flag will be inserted.
With "-b" and "-t", always only the real data (including a
terminating '\0' byte) will be written; here the optional size
argument will be used to make sure not to overflow the user
provided buffer; the command will abort if the size is not
sufficient. Any remainign space will be '\0' padded.
On successful return, the variable "filesize" will be set.
Note that filesize includes the trailing/terminating '\0'
byte(s).
Usage szenario: create a text snapshot/backup of the current
settings:
=> env export -t 100000
=> era ${backup_addr} +${filesize}
=> cp.b 100000 ${backup_addr} ${filesize}
Re-import this snapshot, deleting all other settings:
=> env import -d -t ${backup_addr}
- env import [-d] [-t | -b | -c] addr [size]
import external format (text or binary) into hash table,
optionally deleting existing values:
-d: delete existing environment before importing;
otherwise overwrite / append to existion definitions
-t: assume text format; either "size" must be given or the
text data must be '\0' terminated
-b: assume binary format ('\0' separated, "\0\0" terminated)
-c: assume checksum protected environment format
addr: memory address to read from
size: length of input data; if missing, proper '\0'
termination is mandatory
- env default -f
reset default environment: drop all environment settings and load
default environment
- env ask name [message] [size]
same as "askenv": ask for environment variable
- env edit name
same as "editenv": edit environment variable
- env run
same as "run": run commands in an environment variable
======================================================================
TODO:
- drop default env as implemented now; provide a text file based
initialization instead (eventually using several text files to
incrementally build it from common blocks) and a tool to convert it
into a binary blob / object file.
- It would be nice if we could add wildcard support for environment
variables; this is needed for variable name auto-completion,
but it would also be nice to be able to say "printenv ip*" or
"printenv *addr*"
- Some boards don't link any more due to the grown code size:
DU405, canyonlands, sequoia, socrates.
=> cc: Matthias Fuchs <matthias.fuchs@esd-electronics.com>,
Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>,
Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
- Dropping forceenv() causes build problems on schmoogie
=> cc: Sergey Kubushyn <ksi@koi8.net>
- Build tested on PPC and ARM only; runtime tested with NOR and NAND
flash only => needs testing!!
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
Cc: Matthias Fuchs <matthias.fuchs@esd-electronics.com>,
Cc: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>,
Cc: Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
Cc: Sergey Kubushyn <ksi@koi8.net>
2010-06-20 21:33:59 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES
|
|
|
|
|
2010-10-27 20:48:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used
|
|
|
|
internally to store the environment settings. The default
|
|
|
|
setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most
|
|
|
|
cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see
|
|
|
|
lib/hashtable.c for details.
|
New implementation for internal handling of environment variables.
Motivation:
* Old environment code used a pessimizing implementation:
- variable lookup used linear search => slow
- changed/added variables were added at the end, i. e. most
frequently used variables had the slowest access times => slow
- each setenv() would calculate the CRC32 checksum over the whole
environment block => slow
* "redundant" envrionment was locked down to two copies
* No easy way to implement features like "reset to factory defaults",
or to select one out of several pre-defined (previously saved) sets
of environment settings ("profiles")
* No easy way to import or export environment settings
======================================================================
API Changes:
- Variable names starting with '#' are no longer allowed
I didn't find any such variable names being used; it is highly
recommended to follow standard conventions and start variable names
with an alphanumeric character
- "printenv" will now print a backslash at the end of all but the last
lines of a multi-line variable value.
Multi-line variables have never been formally defined, allthough
there is no reason not to use them. Now we define rules how to deal
with them, allowing for import and export.
- Function forceenv() and the related code in saveenv() was removed.
At the moment this is causing build problems for the only user of
this code (schmoogie - which has no entry in MAINTAINERS); may be
fixed later by implementing the "env set -f" feature.
Inconsistencies:
- "printenv" will '\\'-escape the '\n' in multi-line variables, while
"printenv var" will not do that.
======================================================================
Advantages:
- "printenv" output much better readable (sorted)
- faster!
- extendable (additional variable properties can be added)
- new, powerful features like "factory reset" or easy switching
between several different environment settings ("profiles")
Disadvantages:
- Image size grows by typically 5...7 KiB (might shrink a bit again on
systems with redundant environment with a following patch series)
======================================================================
Implemented:
- env command with subcommands:
- env print [arg ...]
same as "printenv": print environment
- env set [-f] name [arg ...]
same as "setenv": set (and delete) environment variables
["-f" - force setting even for read-only variables - not
implemented yet.]
- end delete [-f] name
not implemented yet
["-f" - force delete even for read-only variables]
- env save
same as "saveenv": save environment
- env export [-t | -b | -c] addr [size]
export internal representation (hash table) in formats usable for
persistent storage or processing:
-t: export as text format; if size is given, data will be
padded with '\0' bytes; if not, one terminating '\0'
will be added (which is included in the "filesize"
setting so you can for exmple copy this to flash and
keep the termination).
-b: export as binary format (name=value pairs separated by
'\0', list end marked by double "\0\0")
-c: export as checksum protected environment format as
used for example by "saveenv" command
addr: memory address where environment gets stored
size: size of output buffer
With "-c" and size is NOT given, then the export command will
format the data as currently used for the persistent storage,
i. e. it will use CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE as output block size and
prepend a valid CRC32 checksum and, in case of resundant
environment, a "current" redundancy flag. If size is given, this
value will be used instead of CONFIG_ENV_SECT_SIZE; again, CRC32
checksum and redundancy flag will be inserted.
With "-b" and "-t", always only the real data (including a
terminating '\0' byte) will be written; here the optional size
argument will be used to make sure not to overflow the user
provided buffer; the command will abort if the size is not
sufficient. Any remainign space will be '\0' padded.
On successful return, the variable "filesize" will be set.
Note that filesize includes the trailing/terminating '\0'
byte(s).
Usage szenario: create a text snapshot/backup of the current
settings:
=> env export -t 100000
=> era ${backup_addr} +${filesize}
=> cp.b 100000 ${backup_addr} ${filesize}
Re-import this snapshot, deleting all other settings:
=> env import -d -t ${backup_addr}
- env import [-d] [-t | -b | -c] addr [size]
import external format (text or binary) into hash table,
optionally deleting existing values:
-d: delete existing environment before importing;
otherwise overwrite / append to existion definitions
-t: assume text format; either "size" must be given or the
text data must be '\0' terminated
-b: assume binary format ('\0' separated, "\0\0" terminated)
-c: assume checksum protected environment format
addr: memory address to read from
size: length of input data; if missing, proper '\0'
termination is mandatory
- env default -f
reset default environment: drop all environment settings and load
default environment
- env ask name [message] [size]
same as "askenv": ask for environment variable
- env edit name
same as "editenv": edit environment variable
- env run
same as "run": run commands in an environment variable
======================================================================
TODO:
- drop default env as implemented now; provide a text file based
initialization instead (eventually using several text files to
incrementally build it from common blocks) and a tool to convert it
into a binary blob / object file.
- It would be nice if we could add wildcard support for environment
variables; this is needed for variable name auto-completion,
but it would also be nice to be able to say "printenv ip*" or
"printenv *addr*"
- Some boards don't link any more due to the grown code size:
DU405, canyonlands, sequoia, socrates.
=> cc: Matthias Fuchs <matthias.fuchs@esd-electronics.com>,
Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>,
Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
- Dropping forceenv() causes build problems on schmoogie
=> cc: Sergey Kubushyn <ksi@koi8.net>
- Build tested on PPC and ARM only; runtime tested with NOR and NAND
flash only => needs testing!!
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Denk <wd@denx.de>
Cc: Matthias Fuchs <matthias.fuchs@esd-electronics.com>,
Cc: Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de>,
Cc: Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de>
Cc: Sergey Kubushyn <ksi@koi8.net>
2010-06-20 21:33:59 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
|
2013-09-16 11:15:45 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
calling env set. Variables can be restricted to only decimal,
|
|
|
|
hexadecimal, or boolean. If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined,
|
|
|
|
the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The format of the list is:
|
|
|
|
type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m]
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
access_attribute = [a|r|o|c]
|
|
|
|
attributes = type_attribute[access_attribute]
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
entry = variable_name[:attributes]
|
|
|
|
list = entry[,list]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The type attributes are:
|
|
|
|
s - String (default)
|
|
|
|
d - Decimal
|
|
|
|
x - Hexadecimal
|
|
|
|
b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF])
|
|
|
|
i - IP address
|
|
|
|
m - MAC address
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:34 +00:00
|
|
|
The access attributes are:
|
|
|
|
a - Any (default)
|
|
|
|
r - Read-only
|
|
|
|
o - Write-once
|
|
|
|
c - Change-default
|
|
|
|
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
|
|
|
|
Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags"
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
environment variable in the default or embedded environment.
|
2012-12-12 04:16:31 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
|
|
|
|
Define this to a list (string) to define validation that
|
|
|
|
should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags"
|
|
|
|
environment variable. To override a setting in the static
|
|
|
|
list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the
|
|
|
|
".flags" variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-05-20 19:27:20 +00:00
|
|
|
If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a
|
|
|
|
regular expression. This allows multiple variables to define the same
|
|
|
|
flags without explicitly listing them for each variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
The following definitions that deal with the placement and management
|
|
|
|
of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the
|
|
|
|
following configurations:
|
|
|
|
|
2011-07-08 10:44:25 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils
|
|
|
|
may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
in U-Boot initialization (when we try to get the setting of for the
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot will hang.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the
|
|
|
|
environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to
|
|
|
|
keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv"
|
|
|
|
to save the current settings.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-03-08 00:33:20 +00:00
|
|
|
BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use
|
|
|
|
"saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the
|
2012-08-09 05:10:01 +00:00
|
|
|
environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link,
|
|
|
|
but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface.
|
2012-03-08 00:33:20 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-05-18 14:07:22 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the
|
|
|
|
environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE.
|
|
|
|
|
2007-11-02 20:15:42 +00:00
|
|
|
Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been
|
2017-08-03 18:22:12 +00:00
|
|
|
created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use env_get_f()
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
until then to read environment variables.
|
|
|
|
|
2003-03-31 16:34:49 +00:00
|
|
|
The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor
|
|
|
|
is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working
|
|
|
|
with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is
|
|
|
|
necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the
|
|
|
|
"baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't
|
|
|
|
have any device yet where we could complain.]
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if
|
|
|
|
the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you
|
2003-03-31 16:34:49 +00:00
|
|
|
use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN:
|
2003-10-15 23:53:47 +00:00
|
|
|
Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED.
|
2003-10-08 22:33:00 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR
|
2003-10-08 22:33:00 +00:00
|
|
|
also needs to be defined.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR:
|
2003-10-15 23:53:47 +00:00
|
|
|
MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-02-18 22:30:44 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS:
|
|
|
|
Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init
|
|
|
|
and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at
|
|
|
|
drivers/serial/ns16550.c. This option is useful for saving
|
|
|
|
space for already greatly restricted images, including but not
|
|
|
|
limited to NAND_SPL configurations.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-11-30 13:01:18 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO
|
|
|
|
Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on
|
|
|
|
when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called
|
|
|
|
to do this.
|
|
|
|
|
arm: Add CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE to display board info on LCD
This option displays board info after stdio is running, so that it will
appear on the LCD. If it is displayed earlier, the board info will appear
on the serial console but not on the LCD.
Here follows a blow-by-blow description.
1a. Without CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE, on serial:
U-Boot 2011.12-02550-g037e1c5-dirty (Nov 15 2012 - 14:29:42) for SMDK5250
CPU: S5PC520 @ 1700MHz
Board: Google Snow, rev 0
I2C: ready
DRAM: 2 GiB Elpida DDR3 @ 800MHz
MMC: S5P MSHC0: 0, S5P MSHC1: 1
SF: Detected W25Q32 with page size 4 KiB, total 4 MiB
*** Warning - bad CRC, using default environment
In: mkbp-keyb
Out: lcd
Err: lcd
Net: No ethernet found.
Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
SMDK5250 #
1b. Without CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE, on LCD (note machine info
is missing):
In: mkbp-keyb
Out: lcd
Err: lcd
Net: No ethernet found.
Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
SMDK5250 #
2a. With CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE, on serial:
U-Boot 2011.12-02550-g037e1c5 (Nov 15 2012 - 14:27:40) for SMDK5250
CPU: S5PC520 @ 1700MHz
I2C: ready
DRAM: 2 GiB Elpida DDR3 @ 800MHz
MMC: S5P MSHC0: 0, S5P MSHC1: 1
SF: Detected W25Q32 with page size 4 KiB, total 4 MiB
*** Warning - bad CRC, using default environment
Model: Google Snow
In: mkbp-keyb
Out: lcd
Err: lcd
Net: No ethernet found.
Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
SMDK5250 #
2b. With CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE, on LCD (note machine info is present):
Model: Google Snow
In: mkbp-keyb
Out: lcd
Err: lcd
Net: No ethernet found.
Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
SMDK5250 #
Since the LCD is all that a typical user sees, it is useful to display
the model there.
We may be able to rearrange things some other way one day, but at
present this seems like a convenient way of getting the required
behaviour.
Signed-off-by: Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
2012-11-30 13:01:19 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE
|
|
|
|
Similar to the previous option, but display this information
|
|
|
|
later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if
|
|
|
|
present.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-08-11 14:40:43 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT:
|
|
|
|
Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the
|
|
|
|
build system checks that the actual size does not
|
|
|
|
exceed it.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Low Level (hardware related) configuration options:
|
2003-03-26 06:55:25 +00:00
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Cache Line Size of the CPU.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-08-04 23:03:41 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT:
|
|
|
|
Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale
|
|
|
|
PowerPC SOCs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR:
|
|
|
|
Virtual address of CCSR. On a 32-bit build, this is typically
|
|
|
|
the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS:
|
|
|
|
Physical address of CCSR. CCSR can be relocated to a new
|
|
|
|
physical address, if desired. In this case, this macro should
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
be set to that address. Otherwise, it should be set to the
|
2011-08-04 23:03:41 +00:00
|
|
|
same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. For example, CCSR
|
|
|
|
is typically relocated on 36-bit builds. It is recommended
|
|
|
|
that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH
|
|
|
|
* 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH:
|
2011-10-07 07:58:21 +00:00
|
|
|
Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This value is typically
|
|
|
|
either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build). This macro is
|
2011-08-04 23:03:41 +00:00
|
|
|
used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
|
|
|
|
integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW:
|
|
|
|
Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This macro is
|
|
|
|
used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
|
|
|
|
integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE:
|
|
|
|
If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be
|
|
|
|
forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-04-11 20:45:32 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_IDE_AHB:
|
|
|
|
Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI
|
|
|
|
interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface.
|
|
|
|
When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to
|
|
|
|
IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional
|
|
|
|
registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
is required.
|
2011-04-11 20:45:32 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_IMMR: Physical address of the Internal Memory.
|
2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00:00
|
|
|
DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're
|
powerpc: Partialy restore core of mpc8xx
CS Systemes d'Information (CSSI) manufactures 8xx boards for
critical communication systems. Those boards have been
running U-Boot since 2010 and will have to be maintained
until at least 2027.
commit 5b8e76c35ec312a3f73126bd1a2d2c0965b98a9f
("powerpc, 8xx: remove support for 8xx") orphaned those boards
by removing support for the mpc8xx CPU.
This commit partially restores support for the 8xx, with the
following limitations:
- Restores support for MPC866 and MPC885 only
- Does not restore IDE, PCMCIA, I2C, USB
- Does not restore examples
- Does not restore POST
- Does not restore Ethernet on SCC
- Does not restore console on SCC
- Does not restore bedbug and kgdb support
As the 866 and 885 do not support the following features,
they are not restored either:
- VIDEO / LCD
- RTC clock
The CPM uCODE patch is not restored either, because:
- 866 and 885 already have support for I2C and SPI relocation
without a uCODE patch
- relocation of SMC, I2C or SPI is only needed for using SCCs
for Ethernet or QMC
The dynamic setup/calculation of clocks is removed, we
expect the target being use with the clock and PLPRCR register
defined in the configuration.
All the clock settings for 8xx prior to 866 is removed as
well as we now only support 866 and 885.
This code is mature and addresses mature boards. Therefore
all code enclosed in '#if 0/#endif' and '#if XX_DEBUG/#endif'
is unneeded.
The following files are not restored by this patch:
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/bedbug_860.c
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/fec.h
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/kgdb.S
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/plprcr_write.S
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/scc.c
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/upatch.c
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/video.c
- arch/powerpc/include/asm/status_led.h
- arch/powerpc/lib/ide.c
- arch/powerpc/lib/ide.h
- doc/README.MPC866
- drivers/pcmcia/mpc8xx_pcmcia.c
- drivers/rtc/mpc8xx.c
- drivers/usb/gadget/mpc8xx_udc.c
- drivers/video/mpc8xx_lcd.c
- examples/standalone/test_burst.c
- examples/standalone/test_burst.h
- examples/standalone/test_burst_lib.S
- examples/standalone/timer.c
- include/mpc823_lcd.h
- include/usb/mpc8xx_udc.h
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/Makefile
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/cache.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/cache_8xx.S
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/ether.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/spr.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/uart.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/usb.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/watchdog.c
Some of the restored files are not located in a proper location.
In order to keep traceability of the changes, they will be
moved to their correct location and moved to Kconfig in a
followup patch.
This patch also declares CSSI as point of contact for the update
of the 8xx platform, as those boards are the only ones still
being maintained on the 8xx area. A later patch will add
those boards to the tree.
Signed-off-by: Christophe Leroy <christophe.leroy@c-s.fr>
2017-07-06 08:23:22 +00:00
|
|
|
doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx systems only]
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-09-05 23:19:14 +00:00
|
|
|
Start address of memory area that can be used for
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
initial data and stack; please note that this must be
|
|
|
|
writable memory that is working WITHOUT special
|
|
|
|
initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which
|
|
|
|
will become available only after programming the
|
|
|
|
memory controller and running certain initialization
|
|
|
|
sequences.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot uses the following memory types:
|
powerpc: Partialy restore core of mpc8xx
CS Systemes d'Information (CSSI) manufactures 8xx boards for
critical communication systems. Those boards have been
running U-Boot since 2010 and will have to be maintained
until at least 2027.
commit 5b8e76c35ec312a3f73126bd1a2d2c0965b98a9f
("powerpc, 8xx: remove support for 8xx") orphaned those boards
by removing support for the mpc8xx CPU.
This commit partially restores support for the 8xx, with the
following limitations:
- Restores support for MPC866 and MPC885 only
- Does not restore IDE, PCMCIA, I2C, USB
- Does not restore examples
- Does not restore POST
- Does not restore Ethernet on SCC
- Does not restore console on SCC
- Does not restore bedbug and kgdb support
As the 866 and 885 do not support the following features,
they are not restored either:
- VIDEO / LCD
- RTC clock
The CPM uCODE patch is not restored either, because:
- 866 and 885 already have support for I2C and SPI relocation
without a uCODE patch
- relocation of SMC, I2C or SPI is only needed for using SCCs
for Ethernet or QMC
The dynamic setup/calculation of clocks is removed, we
expect the target being use with the clock and PLPRCR register
defined in the configuration.
All the clock settings for 8xx prior to 866 is removed as
well as we now only support 866 and 885.
This code is mature and addresses mature boards. Therefore
all code enclosed in '#if 0/#endif' and '#if XX_DEBUG/#endif'
is unneeded.
The following files are not restored by this patch:
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/bedbug_860.c
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/fec.h
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/kgdb.S
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/plprcr_write.S
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/scc.c
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/upatch.c
- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/video.c
- arch/powerpc/include/asm/status_led.h
- arch/powerpc/lib/ide.c
- arch/powerpc/lib/ide.h
- doc/README.MPC866
- drivers/pcmcia/mpc8xx_pcmcia.c
- drivers/rtc/mpc8xx.c
- drivers/usb/gadget/mpc8xx_udc.c
- drivers/video/mpc8xx_lcd.c
- examples/standalone/test_burst.c
- examples/standalone/test_burst.h
- examples/standalone/test_burst_lib.S
- examples/standalone/timer.c
- include/mpc823_lcd.h
- include/usb/mpc8xx_udc.h
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/Makefile
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/cache.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/cache_8xx.S
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/ether.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/spr.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/uart.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/usb.c
- post/cpu/mpc8xx/watchdog.c
Some of the restored files are not located in a proper location.
In order to keep traceability of the changes, they will be
moved to their correct location and moved to Kconfig in a
followup patch.
This patch also declares CSSI as point of contact for the update
of the 8xx platform, as those boards are the only ones still
being maintained on the 8xx area. A later patch will add
those boards to the tree.
Signed-off-by: Christophe Leroy <christophe.leroy@c-s.fr>
2017-07-06 08:23:22 +00:00
|
|
|
- MPC8xx: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Offset of the initial data structure in the memory
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
data is located at the end of the available space
|
2010-10-26 11:32:32 +00:00
|
|
|
(sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE -
|
2016-10-03 00:01:06 +00:00
|
|
|
GENERATED_GBL_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR +
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note:
|
|
|
|
On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data
|
|
|
|
cache for initial memory) the address chosen for
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between
|
|
|
|
the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SCCR: System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
SDRAM timing
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
periodic timer for refresh
|
|
|
|
|
2010-12-30 18:09:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIO:
|
|
|
|
Chip has SRIO or not
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SRIO1:
|
|
|
|
Board has SRIO 1 port available
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SRIO2:
|
|
|
|
Board has SRIO 2 port available
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-07 08:30:46 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER
|
|
|
|
Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE
|
|
|
|
|
2010-12-30 18:09:53 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT:
|
|
|
|
Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
|
|
|
|
|
2019-11-14 19:57:09 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYxS:
|
2010-12-30 18:09:53 +00:00
|
|
|
Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE:
|
|
|
|
Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region
|
|
|
|
|
2013-04-11 09:35:34 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT
|
|
|
|
Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using
|
|
|
|
a 16 bit bus.
|
|
|
|
Not all NAND drivers use this symbol.
|
2013-04-11 09:35:35 +00:00
|
|
|
Example of drivers that use it:
|
2018-08-16 15:30:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- drivers/mtd/nand/raw/ndfc.c
|
|
|
|
- drivers/mtd/nand/raw/mxc_nand.c
|
2011-05-19 19:08:36 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG
|
|
|
|
Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined
|
|
|
|
a default value will be used.
|
|
|
|
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common
|
|
|
|
with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs
|
|
|
|
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS
|
|
|
|
I2C address of the SPD EEPROM
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first
|
|
|
|
one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve
|
|
|
|
to something your driver can deal with.
|
2006-09-07 20:50:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-06-07 01:42:16 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING
|
|
|
|
Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with
|
|
|
|
soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing
|
|
|
|
parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into
|
|
|
|
header files or board specific files.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-09-16 20:21:35 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE
|
|
|
|
Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-01-06 21:18:55 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_SYNC_REFRESH
|
|
|
|
Enable sync of refresh for multiple controllers.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-03-19 16:30:28 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_BIST
|
|
|
|
Enable built-in memory test for Freescale DDR controllers.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should
|
|
|
|
be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3.
|
2006-11-01 00:44:42 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-04-18 10:13:26 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_RMII
|
|
|
|
Enable RMII mode for all FECs.
|
|
|
|
Note that this is a global option, we can't
|
|
|
|
have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-04-23 20:32:05 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY
|
|
|
|
Add a verify option to the crc32 command.
|
|
|
|
The syntax is:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Where address/count indicate a memory area
|
|
|
|
and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the
|
|
|
|
area should have.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-07-11 17:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_LOOPW
|
|
|
|
Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if
|
2017-08-04 22:34:27 +00:00
|
|
|
the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY).
|
2004-07-11 17:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2020-01-29 16:17:18 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_CMD_MX_CYCLIC
|
2004-12-16 18:46:55 +00:00
|
|
|
Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic
|
|
|
|
"md/mw" commands.
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00:00
|
|
|
=> mdc.b 10 4 500
|
2004-12-16 18:46:55 +00:00
|
|
|
This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00:00
|
|
|
=> mwc.l 100 12345678 10
|
2004-12-16 18:46:55 +00:00
|
|
|
This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00:00
|
|
|
This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated
|
2017-08-04 22:34:27 +00:00
|
|
|
globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY).
|
2004-12-16 18:46:55 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-07-13 05:11:07 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SPL_BUILD
|
2019-11-14 02:18:03 +00:00
|
|
|
Set when the currently-running compilation is for an artifact
|
|
|
|
that will end up in the SPL (as opposed to the TPL or U-Boot
|
|
|
|
proper). Code that needs stage-specific behavior should check
|
|
|
|
this.
|
2005-04-02 23:52:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-08-16 07:16:15 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_TPL_BUILD
|
2019-11-14 02:18:03 +00:00
|
|
|
Set when the currently-running compilation is for an artifact
|
|
|
|
that will end up in the TPL (as opposed to the SPL or U-Boot
|
|
|
|
proper). Code that needs stage-specific behavior should check
|
|
|
|
this.
|
2013-08-16 07:16:15 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-05-20 06:07:23 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC
|
|
|
|
Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section
|
|
|
|
.resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the
|
|
|
|
previous 4k of the .text section.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-02-24 17:33:14 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM
|
|
|
|
Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses
|
|
|
|
effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard
|
|
|
|
U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated
|
|
|
|
to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since
|
|
|
|
it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all
|
|
|
|
addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses
|
|
|
|
to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem().
|
|
|
|
|
2013-02-14 04:18:54 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR
|
|
|
|
If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not
|
|
|
|
needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot.
|
2012-11-27 21:08:06 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-04-04 17:16:50 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE
|
|
|
|
Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver
|
|
|
|
driver that uses this:
|
2018-08-16 15:30:07 +00:00
|
|
|
drivers/mtd/nand/raw/davinci_nand.c
|
2014-04-04 17:16:50 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2011-11-22 15:21:25 +00:00
|
|
|
Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support:
|
|
|
|
-----------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the
|
|
|
|
loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format.
|
|
|
|
This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
|
|
|
|
are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
|
|
|
|
within that device.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-03-21 08:21:44 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR
|
|
|
|
The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located. The
|
2019-05-12 11:59:12 +00:00
|
|
|
meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_xxx macro
|
2014-03-21 08:21:44 +00:00
|
|
|
is also specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR
|
|
|
|
The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located. The
|
2019-05-12 11:59:12 +00:00
|
|
|
meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_xxx macro
|
2011-11-22 15:21:25 +00:00
|
|
|
is also specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH
|
|
|
|
The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format
|
|
|
|
has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it
|
|
|
|
might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some
|
|
|
|
local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR
|
|
|
|
Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as
|
|
|
|
normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the
|
|
|
|
virtual address in NOR flash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND
|
|
|
|
Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash.
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC
|
|
|
|
Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC
|
|
|
|
device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-03-08 00:33:18 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE
|
|
|
|
Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master)
|
|
|
|
memory space. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which
|
2012-08-09 05:10:01 +00:00
|
|
|
can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound
|
|
|
|
window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in
|
|
|
|
master's memory space.
|
2011-11-22 15:21:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-06-23 22:15:55 +00:00
|
|
|
Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support:
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of
|
|
|
|
"firmware".
|
|
|
|
This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
|
|
|
|
are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
|
|
|
|
within that device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET
|
|
|
|
Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-06-02 05:25:52 +00:00
|
|
|
Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support:
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
The Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support supports the loading of
|
|
|
|
"Debug Server firmware" and triggering SP boot-rom.
|
|
|
|
This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-12-07 19:08:58 +00:00
|
|
|
- CONFIG_SYS_MC_RSV_MEM_ALIGN
|
|
|
|
Define alignment of reserved memory MC requires
|
2015-06-02 05:25:52 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-07-26 16:48:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Reproducible builds
|
|
|
|
-------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In order to achieve reproducible builds, timestamps used in the U-Boot build
|
|
|
|
process have to be set to a fixed value.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is done using the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment variable.
|
|
|
|
SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH is to be set on the build host's shell, not as a configuration
|
|
|
|
option for U-Boot or an environment variable in U-Boot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should be set to a number of seconds since the epoch, in UTC.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
Building the Software:
|
|
|
|
======================
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments
|
|
|
|
and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support
|
|
|
|
all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all
|
|
|
|
(potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we
|
2020-10-08 04:17:16 +00:00
|
|
|
recommend to use the ELDK (see https://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK)
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you
|
|
|
|
have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case,
|
|
|
|
you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell.
|
|
|
|
Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are
|
|
|
|
necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
$ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx-
|
|
|
|
$ export CROSS_COMPILE
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the
|
|
|
|
sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
is done by typing:
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make NAME_defconfig
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu-
|
2020-02-24 17:36:30 +00:00
|
|
|
rations; see configs/*_defconfig for supported names.
|
2004-04-15 23:14:49 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2020-02-24 17:36:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: for some boards special configuration names may exist; check if
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
additional information is available from the board vendor; for
|
|
|
|
instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard)
|
|
|
|
or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features"
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
when choosing the configuration, i. e.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make TQM823L_defconfig
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
etc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot
|
|
|
|
images ready for download to / installation on your system:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image
|
|
|
|
- "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format
|
|
|
|
- "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format
|
|
|
|
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved
|
|
|
|
in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change
|
|
|
|
this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Add O= to the make command line invocations:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
make O=/tmp/build distclean
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
make O=/tmp/build all
|
|
|
|
|
2014-11-06 12:39:05 +00:00
|
|
|
2. Set environment variable KBUILD_OUTPUT to point to the desired location:
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-11-06 12:39:05 +00:00
|
|
|
export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
make distclean
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make NAME_defconfig
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
make all
|
|
|
|
|
2014-11-06 12:39:05 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
variable.
|
|
|
|
|
2018-01-26 15:31:04 +00:00
|
|
|
User specific CPPFLAGS, AFLAGS and CFLAGS can be passed to the compiler by
|
|
|
|
setting the according environment variables KCPPFLAGS, KAFLAGS and KCFLAGS.
|
|
|
|
For example to treat all compiler warnings as errors:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
make KCFLAGS=-Werror
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so
|
|
|
|
for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of
|
|
|
|
native "make".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need
|
|
|
|
to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these
|
|
|
|
steps:
|
|
|
|
|
2015-12-25 13:41:18 +00:00
|
|
|
1. Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least
|
2015-12-25 13:41:18 +00:00
|
|
|
the "Makefile" and a "<board>.c".
|
|
|
|
2. Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for
|
|
|
|
your board.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
3. If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new
|
|
|
|
directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need.
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
4. Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
5. Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file
|
|
|
|
to be installed on your target system.
|
|
|
|
6. Debug and solve any problems that might arise.
|
|
|
|
[Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.:
|
|
|
|
==============================================================
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board
|
|
|
|
or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes
|
2019-11-14 02:18:03 +00:00
|
|
|
the form of a "patch", i.e. a context diff against a certain (latest
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi-
|
|
|
|
cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so,
|
2016-07-28 02:33:08 +00:00
|
|
|
just run the buildman script (tools/buildman/buildman), which will
|
|
|
|
configure and build U-Boot for ALL supported system. Be warned, this
|
|
|
|
will take a while. Please see the buildman README, or run 'buildman -H'
|
|
|
|
for documentation.
|
2006-09-07 15:25:40 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Monitor Commands - Overview:
|
|
|
|
============================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
go - start application at address 'addr'
|
|
|
|
run - run commands in an environment variable
|
|
|
|
bootm - boot application image from memory
|
|
|
|
bootp - boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol
|
2012-03-14 21:52:45 +00:00
|
|
|
bootz - boot zImage from memory
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol
|
|
|
|
and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip"
|
|
|
|
(and eventually "gatewayip")
|
2011-10-24 18:00:07 +00:00
|
|
|
tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol
|
|
|
|
diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd'
|
|
|
|
loads - load S-Record file over serial line
|
|
|
|
loadb - load binary file over serial line (kermit mode)
|
|
|
|
md - memory display
|
|
|
|
mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing)
|
|
|
|
nm - memory modify (constant address)
|
|
|
|
mw - memory write (fill)
|
2020-06-03 01:26:49 +00:00
|
|
|
ms - memory search
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
cp - memory copy
|
|
|
|
cmp - memory compare
|
|
|
|
crc32 - checksum calculation
|
2009-04-19 03:34:03 +00:00
|
|
|
i2c - I2C sub-system
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
sspi - SPI utility commands
|
|
|
|
base - print or set address offset
|
|
|
|
printenv- print environment variables
|
2020-12-22 06:00:05 +00:00
|
|
|
pwm - control pwm channels
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
setenv - set environment variables
|
|
|
|
saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage
|
|
|
|
protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection
|
|
|
|
erase - erase FLASH memory
|
|
|
|
flinfo - print FLASH memory information
|
2012-08-03 05:57:21 +00:00
|
|
|
nand - NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand)
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
bdinfo - print Board Info structure
|
|
|
|
iminfo - print header information for application image
|
|
|
|
coninfo - print console devices and informations
|
|
|
|
ide - IDE sub-system
|
|
|
|
loop - infinite loop on address range
|
2004-07-11 17:40:54 +00:00
|
|
|
loopw - infinite write loop on address range
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
mtest - simple RAM test
|
|
|
|
icache - enable or disable instruction cache
|
|
|
|
dcache - enable or disable data cache
|
|
|
|
reset - Perform RESET of the CPU
|
|
|
|
echo - echo args to console
|
|
|
|
version - print monitor version
|
|
|
|
help - print online help
|
|
|
|
? - alias for 'help'
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Monitor Commands - Detailed Description:
|
|
|
|
========================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
TODO.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For now: just type "help <command>".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces:
|
|
|
|
=======================================
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a
|
|
|
|
"working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding
|
|
|
|
MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0),
|
|
|
|
"eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ...
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance
|
|
|
|
in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon-
|
|
|
|
ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment
|
|
|
|
variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the
|
|
|
|
environment, the SROM's address is used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the
|
|
|
|
environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is
|
|
|
|
used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and
|
|
|
|
both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the
|
|
|
|
addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a
|
|
|
|
warning is printed.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error
|
2015-05-04 19:55:13 +00:00
|
|
|
is raised. If CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, then in this case
|
|
|
|
a random, locally-assigned MAC is used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-04-26 18:11:46 +00:00
|
|
|
If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses
|
2011-10-26 10:21:21 +00:00
|
|
|
will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process. This
|
2010-04-26 18:11:46 +00:00
|
|
|
may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable.
|
|
|
|
The naming convention is as follows:
|
|
|
|
"ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Image Formats:
|
|
|
|
==============
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-12 11:13:13 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on)
|
|
|
|
images in two formats:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
New uImage format (FIT)
|
|
|
|
-----------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar
|
|
|
|
to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple
|
|
|
|
components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by
|
|
|
|
SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Old uImage format
|
|
|
|
-----------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything,
|
|
|
|
preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for
|
|
|
|
details; basically, the header defines the following image properties:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD,
|
|
|
|
4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks,
|
2008-09-08 19:56:49 +00:00
|
|
|
LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY;
|
2021-11-13 17:13:50 +00:00
|
|
|
Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY).
|
2017-07-05 13:25:22 +00:00
|
|
|
* Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, Intel x86,
|
2011-10-19 20:41:11 +00:00
|
|
|
IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit;
|
2017-07-05 13:25:22 +00:00
|
|
|
Currently supported: ARM, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC).
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2)
|
|
|
|
* Load Address
|
|
|
|
* Entry Point
|
|
|
|
* Image Name
|
|
|
|
* Image Timestamp
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header
|
|
|
|
and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by
|
|
|
|
CRC32 checksums.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Linux Support:
|
|
|
|
==============
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application
|
|
|
|
easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of
|
|
|
|
U-Boot.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some
|
|
|
|
special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any
|
|
|
|
"initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image;
|
|
|
|
instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation
|
|
|
|
serves several purposes:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- the same features can be used for other OS or standalone
|
|
|
|
applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the
|
|
|
|
Flash memory footprint)
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because
|
|
|
|
lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd"
|
|
|
|
images; of course this also means that different kernel images can
|
|
|
|
be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't
|
|
|
|
have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just
|
|
|
|
change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the
|
|
|
|
software is easier now.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Linux HOWTO:
|
|
|
|
============
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems:
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to
|
|
|
|
configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware
|
|
|
|
(no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to
|
|
|
|
Linux :-).
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot).
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance
|
|
|
|
include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board
|
2008-09-07 18:18:27 +00:00
|
|
|
Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h,
|
|
|
|
and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR.
|
2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-06-12 05:29:46 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers.
|
|
|
|
If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there
|
|
|
|
is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See
|
|
|
|
doc/driver-model.
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Configuring the Linux kernel:
|
|
|
|
-----------------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root
|
|
|
|
device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Building a Linux Image:
|
|
|
|
-----------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are
|
|
|
|
not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target
|
|
|
|
"uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by
|
|
|
|
U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target,
|
|
|
|
which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a
|
|
|
|
100% compatible format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
2014-08-04 07:26:05 +00:00
|
|
|
make TQM850L_defconfig
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
make oldconfig
|
|
|
|
make dep
|
|
|
|
make uImage
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to
|
|
|
|
encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header information,
|
|
|
|
CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* convert the kernel into a raw binary image:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \
|
|
|
|
-R .note -R .comment \
|
|
|
|
-S vmlinux linux.bin
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* compress the binary image:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
gzip -9 linux.bin
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* package compressed binary image for U-Boot:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \
|
|
|
|
-a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \
|
|
|
|
-d linux.bin.gz uImage
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use
|
|
|
|
with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or
|
|
|
|
combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64
|
|
|
|
byte header containing information about target architecture,
|
|
|
|
operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time
|
|
|
|
stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and
|
|
|
|
print the header information, or to build new images.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information
|
|
|
|
contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes
|
|
|
|
checksum verification:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
tools/mkimage -l image
|
|
|
|
-l ==> list image header information
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image
|
|
|
|
from a "data file" which is used as image payload:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \
|
|
|
|
-n name -d data_file image
|
|
|
|
-A ==> set architecture to 'arch'
|
|
|
|
-O ==> set operating system to 'os'
|
|
|
|
-T ==> set image type to 'type'
|
|
|
|
-C ==> set compression type 'comp'
|
|
|
|
-a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex)
|
|
|
|
-e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex)
|
|
|
|
-n ==> set image name to 'name'
|
|
|
|
-d ==> use image data from 'datafile'
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-29 16:53:29 +00:00
|
|
|
Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load
|
|
|
|
address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the
|
|
|
|
kernel version:
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C,
|
|
|
|
- 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
|
|
|
|
> -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
> -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
> examples/uImage.TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade
|
|
|
|
speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this
|
|
|
|
needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not
|
|
|
|
need to be uncompressed:
|
|
|
|
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
-> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
-> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
|
|
|
|
> -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \
|
2010-04-15 14:07:28 +00:00
|
|
|
> -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
> examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file
|
|
|
|
when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \
|
|
|
|
> -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \
|
|
|
|
> -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd
|
|
|
|
Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
|
|
|
|
Created: Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
2020-10-26 15:40:24 +00:00
|
|
|
The "dumpimage" tool can be used to disassemble or list the contents of images
|
|
|
|
built by mkimage. See dumpimage's help output (-h) for details.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Installing a Linux Image:
|
|
|
|
-------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface,
|
|
|
|
you must convert the image to S-Record format:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot
|
|
|
|
image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to
|
|
|
|
address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to
|
|
|
|
specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads'
|
|
|
|
command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the
|
|
|
|
TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> erase 40100000 401FFFFF
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.......... done
|
|
|
|
Erased 8 sectors
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> loads 40100000
|
|
|
|
## Ready for S-Record download ...
|
|
|
|
~>examples/image.srec
|
|
|
|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
15989 15990 15991 15992
|
|
|
|
[file transfer complete]
|
|
|
|
[connected]
|
|
|
|
## Start Addr = 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command;
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
corruption happened:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> imi 40100000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0000000c
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Boot Linux:
|
|
|
|
-----------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in
|
|
|
|
memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents
|
|
|
|
of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as
|
|
|
|
parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the
|
|
|
|
"printenv" and "setenv" commands:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> printenv bootargs
|
|
|
|
bootargs=root=/dev/ram
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> printenv bootargs
|
|
|
|
bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> bootm 40020000
|
|
|
|
## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0000000c
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
|
|
|
|
Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000
|
|
|
|
Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
|
|
|
|
time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
|
|
|
|
Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
|
|
|
|
Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000]
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT
|
|
|
|
format!) to the "bootm" command:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> imi 40100000 40200000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0000000c
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
## Checking Image at 40200000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> bootm 40100000 40200000
|
|
|
|
## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 0000000c
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
|
|
|
|
## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ...
|
|
|
|
Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
|
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Entry Point: 00000000
|
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
Loading Ramdisk ... OK
|
|
|
|
Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000
|
|
|
|
Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram
|
|
|
|
time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
|
|
|
|
Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0
|
|
|
|
VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
bash#
|
|
|
|
|
2006-06-28 15:41:37 +00:00
|
|
|
Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree:
|
|
|
|
-----------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section
|
|
|
|
titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The
|
|
|
|
following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated
|
|
|
|
flat device tree:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> print oftaddr
|
|
|
|
oftaddr=0x300000
|
|
|
|
=> print oft
|
|
|
|
oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb
|
|
|
|
=> tftp $oftaddr $oft
|
|
|
|
Speed: 1000, full duplex
|
|
|
|
Using TSEC0 device
|
|
|
|
TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101
|
|
|
|
Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'.
|
|
|
|
Load address: 0x300000
|
|
|
|
Loading: #
|
|
|
|
done
|
|
|
|
Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex)
|
|
|
|
=> tftp $loadaddr $bootfile
|
|
|
|
Speed: 1000, full duplex
|
|
|
|
Using TSEC0 device
|
|
|
|
TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2
|
|
|
|
Filename 'uImage'.
|
|
|
|
Load address: 0x200000
|
|
|
|
Loading:############
|
|
|
|
done
|
|
|
|
Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex)
|
|
|
|
=> print loadaddr
|
|
|
|
loadaddr=200000
|
|
|
|
=> print oftaddr
|
|
|
|
oftaddr=0x300000
|
|
|
|
=> bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr
|
|
|
|
## Booting image at 00200000 ...
|
2006-11-27 14:32:42 +00:00
|
|
|
Image Name: Linux-2.6.17-dirty
|
|
|
|
Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
|
|
|
|
Data Size: 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB
|
2006-06-28 15:41:37 +00:00
|
|
|
Load Address: 00000000
|
2006-11-27 14:32:42 +00:00
|
|
|
Entry Point: 00000000
|
2006-06-28 15:41:37 +00:00
|
|
|
Verifying Checksum ... OK
|
|
|
|
Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
|
|
|
|
Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000
|
|
|
|
Using MPC85xx ADS machine description
|
|
|
|
Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb
|
|
|
|
[snip]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
More About U-Boot Image Types:
|
|
|
|
------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot supports the following image types:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment
|
|
|
|
provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave
|
|
|
|
well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from
|
|
|
|
the Standalone Program.
|
|
|
|
"OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which
|
|
|
|
will take over control completely. Usually these programs
|
|
|
|
will install their own set of exception handlers, device
|
|
|
|
drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot
|
|
|
|
expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU.
|
|
|
|
"RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their
|
|
|
|
parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is
|
|
|
|
being started.
|
|
|
|
"Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS
|
|
|
|
(Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like
|
|
|
|
RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want
|
|
|
|
to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot
|
|
|
|
server provides just a single image file, but you want to get
|
|
|
|
for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each
|
|
|
|
image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network
|
|
|
|
byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0".
|
|
|
|
Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by
|
|
|
|
one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to
|
|
|
|
a multiple of 4 bytes).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like
|
|
|
|
U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to
|
|
|
|
flash memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by
|
|
|
|
U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially
|
|
|
|
useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush)
|
|
|
|
as command interpreter.
|
|
|
|
|
2012-03-14 21:52:45 +00:00
|
|
|
Booting the Linux zImage:
|
|
|
|
-------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done
|
|
|
|
using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same
|
|
|
|
as the syntax of "bootm" command.
|
|
|
|
|
2013-05-16 15:40:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply
|
2012-03-18 11:47:58 +00:00
|
|
|
kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the
|
|
|
|
address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following
|
|
|
|
format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>".
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Standalone HOWTO:
|
|
|
|
=================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and
|
|
|
|
run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of
|
|
|
|
U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Two simple examples are included with the sources:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Hello World" Demo:
|
|
|
|
-------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo
|
|
|
|
application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot.
|
|
|
|
It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it
|
|
|
|
like that:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> loads
|
|
|
|
## Ready for S-Record download ...
|
|
|
|
~>examples/hello_world.srec
|
|
|
|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
|
|
|
|
[file transfer complete]
|
|
|
|
[connected]
|
|
|
|
## Start Addr = 0x00040004
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> go 40004 Hello World! This is a test.
|
|
|
|
## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
|
|
|
|
Hello World
|
|
|
|
argc = 7
|
|
|
|
argv[0] = "40004"
|
|
|
|
argv[1] = "Hello"
|
|
|
|
argv[2] = "World!"
|
|
|
|
argv[3] = "This"
|
|
|
|
argv[4] = "is"
|
|
|
|
argv[5] = "a"
|
|
|
|
argv[6] = "test."
|
|
|
|
argv[7] = "<NULL>"
|
|
|
|
Hit any key to exit ...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt
|
|
|
|
handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'.
|
|
|
|
Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second.
|
|
|
|
The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.'
|
|
|
|
character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be
|
|
|
|
controlled by the following keys:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers
|
|
|
|
b - enable interrupts and start timer
|
|
|
|
e - stop timer and disable interrupts
|
|
|
|
q - quit application
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> loads
|
|
|
|
## Ready for S-Record download ...
|
|
|
|
~>examples/timer.srec
|
|
|
|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
|
|
|
|
[file transfer complete]
|
|
|
|
[connected]
|
|
|
|
## Start Addr = 0x00040004
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=> go 40004
|
|
|
|
## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
|
|
|
|
TIMERS=0xfff00980
|
|
|
|
Using timer 1
|
|
|
|
tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hit 'b':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us
|
|
|
|
Enabling timer
|
|
|
|
Hit '?':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] ........
|
|
|
|
tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0
|
|
|
|
Hit '?':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] .
|
|
|
|
tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0
|
|
|
|
Hit '?':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] .
|
|
|
|
tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0
|
|
|
|
Hit '?':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] .
|
|
|
|
tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0
|
|
|
|
Hit 'e':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer
|
|
|
|
Hit 'q':
|
|
|
|
[q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Minicom warning:
|
|
|
|
================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the
|
|
|
|
"minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd)
|
|
|
|
consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under
|
|
|
|
Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and
|
|
|
|
especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and
|
2012-10-01 05:11:56 +00:00
|
|
|
use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command). See
|
2020-10-08 04:17:16 +00:00
|
|
|
https://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3.
|
2012-10-01 05:11:56 +00:00
|
|
|
for help with kermit.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this
|
|
|
|
configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Name Program Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi
|
|
|
|
X kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s Y U Y N N
|
|
|
|
Y kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r N D Y N N
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NetBSD Notes:
|
|
|
|
=============
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host
|
|
|
|
(build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on
|
|
|
|
NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also
|
|
|
|
need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make).
|
|
|
|
Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files;
|
|
|
|
attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is
|
|
|
|
missing. This file has to be installed and patched manually:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include
|
|
|
|
# mkdir powerpc
|
|
|
|
# ln -s powerpc machine
|
|
|
|
# cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h
|
|
|
|
# ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h ## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native
|
|
|
|
and U-Boot include files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a
|
|
|
|
stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel
|
|
|
|
proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source
|
|
|
|
tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the
|
2005-04-13 10:02:42 +00:00
|
|
|
meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Implementation Internals:
|
|
|
|
=========================
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following is not intended to be a complete description of every
|
|
|
|
implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the
|
|
|
|
inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom
|
|
|
|
hardware.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Initial Stack, Global Data:
|
|
|
|
---------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot
|
|
|
|
starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to
|
|
|
|
system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet).
|
|
|
|
This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS
|
|
|
|
is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working
|
|
|
|
at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation
|
|
|
|
options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU
|
|
|
|
models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and
|
|
|
|
MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be
|
|
|
|
locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the
|
2008-12-30 21:56:11 +00:00
|
|
|
U-Boot mailing list:
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)?
|
|
|
|
From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com>
|
|
|
|
Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET)
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it
|
|
|
|
is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not
|
|
|
|
require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness
|
|
|
|
is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of
|
|
|
|
necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and
|
|
|
|
operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It
|
|
|
|
is another option for the system designer to use as an
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your
|
|
|
|
board designers haven't used it for something that would
|
|
|
|
cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not
|
|
|
|
used.
|
|
|
|
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
with your processor/board/system design. The default value
|
|
|
|
you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in
|
2005-08-01 14:49:12 +00:00
|
|
|
walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set
|
|
|
|
it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources
|
|
|
|
that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in
|
|
|
|
start.S has been around a while and should work as is when
|
|
|
|
you get the config right.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-Chris Hallinan
|
|
|
|
DS4.COM, Inc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C
|
|
|
|
code for the initialization procedures:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt
|
|
|
|
to write it.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
* Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitly initialized
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali-
|
|
|
|
zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like
|
|
|
|
that.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
normal global data to share information between the code. But it
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly
|
|
|
|
simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all
|
|
|
|
functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_
|
|
|
|
functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of
|
|
|
|
the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we
|
|
|
|
place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we
|
|
|
|
reserve for this purpose.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the
|
|
|
|
relevant (E)ABI specifications for the current architecture, and by
|
|
|
|
GCC's implementation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use:
|
|
|
|
R1: stack pointer
|
2008-02-14 21:43:22 +00:00
|
|
|
R2: reserved for system use
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
R3-R4: parameter passing and return values
|
|
|
|
R5-R10: parameter passing
|
|
|
|
R13: small data area pointer
|
|
|
|
R30: GOT pointer
|
|
|
|
R31: frame pointer
|
|
|
|
|
2010-01-19 13:41:58 +00:00
|
|
|
(U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12
|
|
|
|
is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when
|
|
|
|
going back and forth between asm and C)
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-02-14 21:43:22 +00:00
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the
|
|
|
|
address of the global data structure is known at compile time),
|
|
|
|
but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat
|
|
|
|
smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on
|
|
|
|
average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image,
|
|
|
|
624 text + 127 data).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
On ARM, the following registers are used:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
R0: function argument word/integer result
|
|
|
|
R1-R3: function argument word
|
2013-09-21 12:04:42 +00:00
|
|
|
R9: platform specific
|
|
|
|
R10: stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled)
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
R11: argument (frame) pointer
|
|
|
|
R12: temporary workspace
|
|
|
|
R13: stack pointer
|
|
|
|
R14: link register
|
|
|
|
R15: program counter
|
|
|
|
|
2013-09-21 12:04:42 +00:00
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2010-05-21 03:08:03 +00:00
|
|
|
On Nios II, the ABI is documented here:
|
2020-10-08 04:17:16 +00:00
|
|
|
https://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf
|
2010-05-21 03:08:03 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp
|
|
|
|
to access small data sections, so gp is free.
|
|
|
|
|
2011-10-19 20:41:11 +00:00
|
|
|
On NDS32, the following registers are used:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
R0-R1: argument/return
|
|
|
|
R2-R5: argument
|
|
|
|
R15: temporary register for assembler
|
|
|
|
R16: trampoline register
|
|
|
|
R28: frame pointer (FP)
|
|
|
|
R29: global pointer (GP)
|
|
|
|
R30: link register (LP)
|
|
|
|
R31: stack pointer (SP)
|
|
|
|
PC: program counter (PC)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data
|
|
|
|
|
2006-03-31 16:32:53 +00:00
|
|
|
NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope,
|
|
|
|
or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2017-12-26 05:55:59 +00:00
|
|
|
On RISC-V, the following registers are used:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
x0: hard-wired zero (zero)
|
|
|
|
x1: return address (ra)
|
|
|
|
x2: stack pointer (sp)
|
|
|
|
x3: global pointer (gp)
|
|
|
|
x4: thread pointer (tp)
|
|
|
|
x5: link register (t0)
|
|
|
|
x8: frame pointer (fp)
|
|
|
|
x10-x11: arguments/return values (a0-1)
|
|
|
|
x12-x17: arguments (a2-7)
|
|
|
|
x28-31: temporaries (t3-6)
|
|
|
|
pc: program counter (pc)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Memory Management:
|
|
|
|
------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the
|
|
|
|
MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory
|
|
|
|
controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each
|
|
|
|
memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several
|
|
|
|
physical memory banks.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on
|
|
|
|
TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After
|
|
|
|
booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself
|
|
|
|
to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some
|
2008-10-16 13:01:15 +00:00
|
|
|
memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board
|
|
|
|
Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB
|
|
|
|
of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like
|
|
|
|
this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0x0000 0000 Exception Vector code
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
0x0000 1FFF
|
|
|
|
0x0000 2000 Free for Application Use
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
0x00FB FF20 Monitor Stack (Growing downward)
|
|
|
|
0x00FB FFAC Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data
|
|
|
|
0x00FC 0000 Malloc Arena
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
|
|
0x00FD FFFF
|
|
|
|
0x00FE 0000 RAM Copy of Monitor Code
|
|
|
|
... eventually: LCD or video framebuffer
|
|
|
|
... eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset)
|
|
|
|
0x00FF FFFF [End of RAM]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
System Initialization:
|
|
|
|
----------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point
|
2008-07-09 06:17:15 +00:00
|
|
|
(on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the on board Flash memory.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address.
|
|
|
|
To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!)
|
|
|
|
initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs
|
2017-06-07 15:33:10 +00:00
|
|
|
which provide such a feature like), or in a locked part of the data
|
|
|
|
cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core, the caches and
|
|
|
|
the SIU.
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a
|
|
|
|
preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries
|
|
|
|
(multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash
|
|
|
|
on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is
|
|
|
|
programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a
|
|
|
|
simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM
|
|
|
|
banks.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of
|
|
|
|
different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first
|
|
|
|
bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address
|
|
|
|
0x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create
|
|
|
|
contiguous memory starting from 0.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area
|
|
|
|
and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board
|
|
|
|
Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM
|
|
|
|
pages, and the final stack is set up.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment;
|
|
|
|
until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are
|
|
|
|
running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a
|
|
|
|
new address in RAM.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
U-Boot Porting Guide:
|
|
|
|
----------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
[Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing
|
|
|
|
list, October 2002]
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
int main(int argc, char *argv[])
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
sighandler_t no_more_time;
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time);
|
|
|
|
alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK));
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
if (available_money > available_manpower) {
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
Pay consultant to port U-Boot;
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Download latest U-Boot source;
|
|
|
|
|
2008-12-30 21:56:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Subscribe to u-boot mailing list;
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
if (clueless)
|
|
|
|
email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?");
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
while (learning) {
|
|
|
|
Read the README file in the top level directory;
|
2020-10-08 04:17:16 +00:00
|
|
|
Read https://www.denx.de/wiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual;
|
2020-02-28 14:18:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Read applicable doc/README.*;
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Read the source, Luke;
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
/* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500))
|
|
|
|
Buy a BDI3000;
|
|
|
|
else
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Add a lot of aggravation and time;
|
|
|
|
|
2009-07-16 00:42:59 +00:00
|
|
|
if (a similar board exists) { /* hopefully... */
|
|
|
|
cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard>
|
|
|
|
cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h
|
|
|
|
} else {
|
|
|
|
Create your own board support subdirectory;
|
|
|
|
Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
Edit new board/<myboard> files
|
|
|
|
Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
while (!accepted) {
|
|
|
|
while (!running) {
|
|
|
|
do {
|
|
|
|
Add / modify source code;
|
|
|
|
} until (compiles);
|
|
|
|
Debug;
|
|
|
|
if (clueless)
|
|
|
|
email("Hi, I am having problems...");
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
Send patch file to the U-Boot email list;
|
|
|
|
if (reasonable critiques)
|
|
|
|
Incorporate improvements from email list code review;
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
Defend code as written;
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
void no_more_time (int sig)
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
hire_a_guru();
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Coding Standards:
|
|
|
|
-----------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel
|
2017-12-10 15:34:35 +00:00
|
|
|
coding style; see the kernel coding style guide at
|
|
|
|
https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/process/coding-style.html, and the
|
|
|
|
script "scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory.
|
2006-09-01 13:39:02 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Source files originating from a different project (for example the
|
|
|
|
MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not
|
2015-01-05 02:56:50 +00:00
|
|
|
reformatted to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those
|
2006-09-01 13:39:02 +00:00
|
|
|
sources.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in
|
|
|
|
Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//)
|
|
|
|
in your code.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Please also stick to the following formatting rules:
|
|
|
|
- remove any trailing white space
|
2011-07-27 10:59:55 +00:00
|
|
|
- use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds
|
2011-07-27 10:59:55 +00:00
|
|
|
- do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
- do not add trailing empty lines to source files
|
2004-01-04 16:28:35 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned
|
|
|
|
with a request to reformat the changes.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Submitting Patches:
|
|
|
|
-------------------
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to
|
|
|
|
establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules
|
|
|
|
may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2020-10-08 04:17:16 +00:00
|
|
|
Please see https://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details.
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-12-30 21:56:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>;
|
2017-11-15 06:56:42 +00:00
|
|
|
see https://lists.denx.de/listinfo/u-boot
|
2008-12-30 21:56:11 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
When you send a patch, please include the following information with
|
|
|
|
it:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes
|
|
|
|
this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the
|
|
|
|
patch actually fixes something.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* For new features: a description of the feature and your
|
|
|
|
implementation.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-12-19 12:16:10 +00:00
|
|
|
* For major contributions, add a MAINTAINERS file with your
|
|
|
|
information and associated file and directory references.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2013-09-11 13:52:51 +00:00
|
|
|
* When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a
|
|
|
|
maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to
|
|
|
|
document these in the README file.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
* The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly*
|
|
|
|
recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the
|
2011-07-27 10:59:55 +00:00
|
|
|
"git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems
|
|
|
|
with some other mail clients.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of
|
|
|
|
diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of
|
|
|
|
GNU diff.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
The current directory when running this command shall be the parent
|
|
|
|
directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that
|
|
|
|
your patch includes sufficient directory information for the
|
|
|
|
affected files).
|
2003-07-15 07:45:49 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-03-26 09:40:12 +00:00
|
|
|
We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged,
|
|
|
|
and compressed attachments must not be used.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several
|
|
|
|
files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file.
|
2003-06-19 23:04:19 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be
|
|
|
|
submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset.
|
2003-06-27 21:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2003-06-19 23:04:19 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
Notes:
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2016-07-28 02:33:08 +00:00
|
|
|
* Before sending the patch, run the buildman script on your patched
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported
|
|
|
|
for any of the boards.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch
|
|
|
|
containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be
|
|
|
|
returned with a request to re-formatting / split it.
|
2002-11-03 00:24:07 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00:00
|
|
|
* If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not
|
|
|
|
add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful!
|
|
|
|
When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only
|
|
|
|
(using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature
|
|
|
|
disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your
|
|
|
|
modification.
|
2005-05-03 14:12:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2008-12-30 21:56:11 +00:00
|
|
|
* Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the
|
|
|
|
u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are
|
|
|
|
reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches
|
|
|
|
bigger than the size limit should be avoided.
|